Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Optimization

1,681 missions · 909 completed

Missions

Open772Completed909All1681
Machine LearningReinforcement Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Theory of Policy Gradient Methods: Optimality, Approximation, and Distribution Shift 4: Log-Barrier-Regularized Softmax Policy Gradient Is ε-Optimal After 320|S|²|A|²D∞²/((1−γ)⁶ε²) StepsResearch Paper

Motivation

Policy gradient methods search directly over parameterized policies of a Markov decision process (MDP) by gradient ascent on the expected discounted reward. They are among the most widely used methods in reinforcement learning, yet the value Vπθ(ρ)V^{\pi_\theta}(\rho)Vπθ​(ρ) is a nonconcave function of the parameters, and until recently little was known about whether, or how fast, such methods reach a globally optimal policy. Agarwal, Kakade, Lee and Mahajan (arXiv:1908.00261v5, JMLR 22(98), 2021) give a systematic answer for tabular and function-approximation settings.

This mission formalizes one of their central results. Under the softmax parameterization, plain gradient ascent converges to optimal values only asymptotically (their Theorem 5.1, rate unknown): parameters can diverge and policies become nearly deterministic early, which stalls progress. Adding a log barrier regularizer, equivalent to a relative-entropy penalty towards the uniform policy, keeps action probabilities away from zero, and the paper shows that this yields an iteration count polynomial in every problem quantity. The result is the "softmax + log barrier" row of the paper's Table 1 and a reference point for later analyses of entropy-regularized policy gradient (for example Mei et al., 2020; Cen et al., 2021).

Setting

A finite MDP consists of finite sets S\mathcal SS (states) and A\mathcal AA (actions, nonempty), a transition kernel P(s′∣s,a)P(s'\mid s,a)P(s′∣s,a), rewards r(s,a)∈[0,1]r(s,a)\in[0,1]r(s,a)∈[0,1] and a discount factor γ∈[0,1)\gamma\in[0,1)γ∈[0,1). A policy π\piπ assigns a probability distribution π(⋅∣s)\pi(\cdot\mid s)π(⋅∣s) over actions to every state. Its value is Vπ(s)=E[∑t≥0γtr(st,at)∣π,s0=s]V^\pi(s)=\mathbb E[\sum_{t\ge0}\gamma^t r(s_t,a_t)\mid\pi,s_0=s]Vπ(s)=E[∑t≥0​γtr(st​,at​)∣π,s0​=s], and for a distribution ρ\rhoρ over states Vπ(ρ)=Es∼ρVπ(s)V^\pi(\rho)=\mathbb E_{s\sim\rho}V^\pi(s)Vπ(ρ)=Es∼ρ​Vπ(s). The action value is Qπ(s,a)=r(s,a)+γ∑s′P(s′∣s,a)Vπ(s′)Q^\pi(s,a)=r(s,a)+\gamma\sum_{s'}P(s'\mid s,a)V^\pi(s')Qπ(s,a)=r(s,a)+γ∑s′​P(s′∣s,a)Vπ(s′) and the advantage is Aπ(s,a)=Qπ(s,a)−Vπ(s)A^\pi(s,a)=Q^\pi(s,a)-V^\pi(s)Aπ(s,a)=Qπ(s,a)−Vπ(s). An optimal policy π⋆\pi^\starπ⋆ maximizes Vπ(s)V^\pi(s)Vπ(s) at every state simultaneously; V⋆=Vπ⋆V^\star=V^{\pi^\star}V⋆=Vπ⋆.

The discounted state visitation distribution is dρπ(s)=(1−γ)∑t≥0γtPr⁡π(st=s∣s0∼ρ)d^\pi_\rho(s)=(1-\gamma)\sum_{t\ge0}\gamma^t\Pr^\pi(s_t=s\mid s_0\sim\rho)dρπ​(s)=(1−γ)∑t≥0​γtPrπ(st​=s∣s0​∼ρ). Given a start distribution μ\muμ used by the algorithm, the distribution mismatch coefficient is ∥dρπ⋆/μ∥∞=max⁡sdρπ⋆(s)/μ(s)\|d^{\pi^\star}_\rho/\mu\|_\infty=\max_s d^{\pi^\star}_\rho(s)/\mu(s)∥dρπ⋆​/μ∥∞​=maxs​dρπ⋆​(s)/μ(s).

The softmax policy with parameter θ∈R∣S∣∣A∣\theta\in\mathbb R^{|\mathcal S||\mathcal A|}θ∈R∣S∣∣A∣ is πθ(a∣s)=exp⁡(θs,a)/∑a′exp⁡(θs,a′)\pi_\theta(a\mid s)=\exp(\theta_{s,a})/\sum_{a'}\exp(\theta_{s,a'})πθ​(a∣s)=exp(θs,a​)/∑a′​exp(θs,a′​). For λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 the log barrier regularized objective is

Lλ(θ)=Vπθ(μ)+λ∣S∣ ∣A∣∑s,alog⁡πθ(a∣s)+λlog⁡∣A∣=Vπθ(μ)−λ Es∼UnifSKL(UnifA,πθ(⋅∣s)),L_\lambda(\theta)=V^{\pi_\theta}(\mu)+\frac{\lambda}{|\mathcal S|\,|\mathcal A|}\sum_{s,a}\log\pi_\theta(a\mid s)+\lambda\log|\mathcal A| =V^{\pi_\theta}(\mu)-\lambda\,\mathbb E_{s\sim\mathrm{Unif}_{\mathcal S}}\mathrm{KL}(\mathrm{Unif}_{\mathcal A},\pi_\theta(\cdot\mid s)),Lλ​(θ)=Vπθ​(μ)+∣S∣∣A∣λ​s,a∑​logπθ​(a∣s)+λlog∣A∣=Vπθ​(μ)−λEs∼UnifS​​KL(UnifA​,πθ​(⋅∣s)),

and gradient ascent with step size η\etaη is θ(t+1)=θ(t)+η∇θLλ(θ(t))\theta^{(t+1)}=\theta^{(t)}+\eta\nabla_\theta L_\lambda(\theta^{(t)})θ(t+1)=θ(t)+η∇θ​Lλ​(θ(t)). Write V(t)=Vπθ(t)V^{(t)}=V^{\pi_{\theta^{(t)}}}V(t)=Vπθ(t)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 5.1 (iteration complexity)

Let D≥dρπ⋆(s)/μ(s)D\ge d^{\pi^\star}_\rho(s)/\mu(s)D≥dρπ⋆​(s)/μ(s) for all sss (for example the mismatch coefficient), ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0, λ=ϵ(1−γ)/(2D)\lambda=\epsilon(1-\gamma)/(2D)λ=ϵ(1−γ)/(2D), βλ=8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣\beta_\lambda=8/(1-\gamma)^3+2\lambda/|\mathcal S|βλ​=8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣ and η=1/βλ\eta=1/\beta_\lambdaη=1/βλ​. Starting from a parameter whose softmax policy is uniform (e.g. θ(0)=0\theta^{(0)}=0θ(0)=0),

min⁡t<T{V⋆(ρ)−V(t)(ρ)}≤ϵwheneverT≥320 ∣S∣2∣A∣2(1−γ)6ϵ2 D2.\min_{t<T}\big\{V^\star(\rho)-V^{(t)}(\rho)\big\}\le\epsilon\quad\text{whenever}\quad T\ge\frac{320\,|\mathcal S|^2|\mathcal A|^2}{(1-\gamma)^6\epsilon^2}\,D^2 .t<Tmin​{V⋆(ρ)−V(t)(ρ)}≤ϵwheneverT≥(1−γ)6ϵ2320∣S∣2∣A∣2​D2.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.2 (performance difference): Vπ(s0)−Vπ′(s0)=11−γEs∼ds0πEa∼π(⋅∣s)Aπ′(s,a)V^\pi(s_0)-V^{\pi'}(s_0)=\frac1{1-\gamma}\mathbb E_{s\sim d^\pi_{s_0}}\mathbb E_{a\sim\pi(\cdot|s)}A^{\pi'}(s,a)Vπ(s0​)−Vπ′(s0​)=1−γ1​Es∼ds0​π​​Ea∼π(⋅∣s)​Aπ′(s,a).
  2. Lemma C.1 (softmax gradient): ∂Vπθ(μ)/∂θs,a=11−γdμπθ(s)πθ(a∣s)Aπθ(s,a)\partial V^{\pi_\theta}(\mu)/\partial\theta_{s,a}=\frac1{1-\gamma}d^{\pi_\theta}_\mu(s)\pi_\theta(a|s)A^{\pi_\theta}(s,a)∂Vπθ​(μ)/∂θs,a​=1−γ1​dμπθ​​(s)πθ​(a∣s)Aπθ​(s,a).
  3. Display (14): the same plus λ∣S∣(1∣A∣−πθ(a∣s))\frac{\lambda}{|\mathcal S|}(\frac1{|\mathcal A|}-\pi_\theta(a|s))∣S∣λ​(∣A∣1​−πθ​(a∣s)) for ∂Lλ/∂θs,a\partial L_\lambda/\partial\theta_{s,a}∂Lλ​/∂θs,a​.
  4. Opening claim of the proof of Theorem 5.2: at an ϵopt\epsilon_{\rm opt}ϵopt​-stationary point with ϵopt≤λ/(2∣S∣∣A∣)\epsilon_{\rm opt}\le\lambda/(2|\mathcal S||\mathcal A|)ϵopt​≤λ/(2∣S∣∣A∣), max⁡aAπθ(s,a)≤2λ/(μ(s)∣S∣)\max_a A^{\pi_\theta}(s,a)\le 2\lambda/(\mu(s)|\mathcal S|)maxa​Aπθ​(s,a)≤2λ/(μ(s)∣S∣).
  5. Theorem 5.2: under the same hypotheses, Vπθ(ρ)≥V⋆(ρ)−2λ1−γ∥dρπ⋆/μ∥∞V^{\pi_\theta}(\rho)\ge V^\star(\rho)-\frac{2\lambda}{1-\gamma}\|d^{\pi^\star}_\rho/\mu\|_\inftyVπθ​(ρ)≥V⋆(ρ)−1−γ2λ​∥dρπ⋆​/μ∥∞​.
  6. Lemma D.4: LλL_\lambdaLλ​ has βλ\beta_\lambdaβλ​-Lipschitz gradient, βλ=8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣\beta_\lambda=8/(1-\gamma)^3+2\lambda/|\mathcal S|βλ​=8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣.
  7. Theorem E.1(3) (Beck, Theorem 10.15), unconstrained ascent form: for β\betaβ-smooth f≤Mf\le Mf≤M and step 1/β1/\beta1/β, min⁡t<T∥∇f(xt)∥≤2β(M−f(x0))/T\min_{t<T}\|\nabla f(x_t)\|\le\sqrt{2\beta(M-f(x_0))}/\sqrt Tmint<T​∥∇f(xt​)∥≤2β(M−f(x0​))​/T​.

Significance

The corollary shows that a first-order method on a nonconcave objective reaches an ϵ\epsilonϵ-optimal policy in a number of steps polynomial in ∣S∣|\mathcal S|∣S∣, ∣A∣|\mathcal A|∣A∣, 1/(1−γ)1/(1-\gamma)1/(1−γ), 1/ϵ1/\epsilon1/ϵ and the mismatch coefficient, with no dependence on the MDP's structure beyond these quantities. Theorem 5.2 is of independent use: it certifies any approximately stationary point of the regularized objective, however it was found, as approximately optimal for the original problem. The dependence on ∥dρπ⋆/μ∥∞\|d^{\pi^\star}_\rho/\mu\|_\infty∥dρπ⋆​/μ∥∞​ makes precise why the exploratory start distribution μ\muμ matters.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them is machine-checked. A formal development adds a checked softmax policy gradient formula on an infinite-horizon discounted MDP, a checked smoothness bound for the regularized objective, the nonconvex gradient-method rate in Euclidean space, and a corrected statement of the corollary (see the next sections). Lemma 3.2 and Lemma C.1 are reused across the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The value function is not concave in θ\thetaθ and its gradient vanishes where policies become deterministic, so the standard route "small gradient implies near-optimal" fails for the unregularized objective. With the regularizer, the link between stationarity and optimality has to hold with explicit constants that do not degrade as policies approach the boundary of the simplex, which is where the unregularized argument breaks down. The second obstacle is smoothness: Vπθ(μ)V^{\pi_\theta}(\mu)Vπθ​(μ) is an infinite discounted sum of products of transition probabilities, and its Hessian must be bounded uniformly in θ\thetaθ by 8/(1−γ)38/(1-\gamma)^38/(1−γ)3, which in Lean means differentiating a tsum of matrix-power–like terms in θ\thetaθ. The policy gradient formula itself requires the same interchange of differentiation and infinite summation.

Formalization scope

States and actions are finite types; A\mathcal AA is nonempty. Parameters live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (S × A), so ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is the ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ norm and ∇θ\nabla_\theta∇θ​ is Mathlib's gradient. The MDP layer (transition kernel, policy, occupation probabilities, VπV^\piVπ, QπQ^\piQπ, optimal policy) is the published FoundationsML.ReinforcementLearning library, and Vπ(ρ)V^\pi(\rho)Vπ(ρ), AπA^\piAπ, dρπd^\pi_\rhodρπ​ are defined on top of it. Standing assumptions are those of §3: PPP a kernel, r∈[0,1]r\in[0,1]r∈[0,1], 0≤γ<10\le\gamma<10≤γ<1, μ,ρ\mu,\rhoμ,ρ probability distributions, π⋆\pi^\starπ⋆ optimal at every state.

Conventions committed to:

  • the mismatch coefficient is replaced by any DDD with dρπ⋆≤Dμd^{\pi^\star}_\rho\le D\mudρπ⋆​≤Dμ componentwise; no division by μ(s)\mu(s)μ(s) occurs, and the same DDD sets λ\lambdaλ;
  • min⁡t<T\min_{t<T}mint<T​ is "there is t<Tt<Tt<T with …";
  • λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, implicit in the paper, is a hypothesis of Theorem 5.2 and its proof-step milestone; λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0 in Lemma D.4;
  • Theorem E.1 is posed for ascent on Rd\mathbb R^dRd with an upper bound MMM in place of an attained optimum.

Two corrections of the printed corollary. The printed statement allows "any initial θ(0)\theta^{(0)}θ(0)", but its proof uses Lλ(θ⋆)−Lλ(θ(0))≤1/(1−γ)L_\lambda(\theta^\star)-L_\lambda(\theta^{(0)})\le1/(1-\gamma)Lλ​(θ⋆)−Lλ​(θ(0))≤1/(1−γ), valid for a uniform initial policy and false in general; the formal goal assumes a uniform start. The printed βλ=8γ/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣\beta_\lambda=8\gamma/(1-\gamma)^3+2\lambda/|\mathcal S|βλ​=8γ/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣ contradicts the proof, which takes βλ\beta_\lambdaβλ​ from Lemma D.4, 8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣8/(1-\gamma)^3+2\lambda/|\mathcal S|8/(1−γ)3+2λ/∣S∣; the formal goal uses the latter, with the same iteration count.

The goal is not trivialized by its encoding: the hypotheses fix the run completely from θ(0)\theta^{(0)}θ(0), λ\lambdaλ and η\etaη, they are jointly satisfiable (a sorry-free check exhibits a one-state, two-action MDP with an optimal policy and D=1D=1D=1), and the conclusion concerns the unregularized value of the iterates. Theorem 5.2, Lemma D.4 and Theorem E.1 are milestones, not hypotheses of the goal.

Infrastructure that a complete development needs, and that is reusable beyond this mission: differentiability of discounted values in the policy parameters and the policy gradient theorem for the softmax class; Hessian bounds for softmax; the descent lemma and the O(1/T)O(1/\sqrt T)O(1/T​) rate of gradient methods for smooth nonconvex functions on Euclidean space. Contributions to any of these, or proofs of single milestones, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Agarwal, S. M. Kakade, J. D. Lee, G. Mahajan, On the Theory of Policy Gradient Methods: Optimality, Approximation, and Distribution Shift, JMLR 22(98), 2021; arXiv:1908.00261v5. https://arxiv.org/abs/1908.00261v5
  • S. Kakade, J. Langford, Approximately Optimal Approximate Reinforcement Learning, ICML 2002. https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/645531.656005
  • A. Beck, First-Order Methods in Optimization, SIAM, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611974997
  • J. Mei, C. Xiao, C. Szepesvári, D. Schuurmans, On the Global Convergence Rates of Softmax Policy Gradient Methods, ICML 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/2005.06392
  • S. Cen, C. Cheng, Y. Chen, Y. Wei, Y. Chi, Fast Global Convergence of Natural Policy Gradient Methods with Entropy Regularization, Operations Research 70(4), 2022. https://arxiv.org/abs/2007.06558
19 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Convergence of Interior-Reflective Newton Methods for Nonlinear Minimization Subject to Bounds 2: Local Interior-Reflective Newton Steps Converge Quadratically near a Nondegenerate MinimizerResearch Paper

Motivation

Bound constrained minimization asks for a low value of a smooth objective while each variable stays between prescribed lower and upper limits. Such limits occur in nonlinear optimization models even when the objective itself has no special convexity. Coleman and Li's interior reflective method was designed to approach a solution from inside those limits while using curvature information from a Newton system. Its local convergence claim explains what the method does after an iterate reaches the neighborhood of a suitably regular solution. The source is Coleman and Li (1994), especially Section 6 and Theorem 13.

The local result is distinct from a claim about finding that neighborhood. An algorithm can have excellent behavior near a solution without being guaranteed to reach it from every starting point. This mission isolates the precise local claim for the method in Fig. 11, including its reflected motion at a bound. It also records a regularity correction: the paper's stated twice continuous differentiability assumption alone does not imply a quadratic rate.

Setting

Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R be the objective and let li≤xi≤uil_i\le x_i\le u_ili​≤xi​≤ui​ describe a box F\mathcal FF. A lower bound may be −∞-\infty−∞ and an upper bound may be +∞+\infty+∞. The strict interior consists of points satisfying li<xi<uil_i<x_i<u_ili​<xi​<ui​ for every coordinate. Write g(x)=∇f(x)g(x)=\nabla f(x)g(x)=∇f(x) and H(x)=∇2f(x)H(x)=\nabla^2f(x)H(x)=∇2f(x).

The method's scaling vector v(x)v(x)v(x) selects a bound according to the sign of gi(x)g_i(x)gi​(x). If gi(x)<0g_i(x)<0gi​(x)<0, it uses xi−uix_i-u_ixi​−ui​ when uiu_iui​ is finite and −1-1−1 otherwise. If gi(x)≥0g_i(x)\ge0gi​(x)≥0, it uses xi−lix_i-l_ixi​−li​ when lil_ili​ is finite and 111 otherwise. Put D(x)=diag⁡(∣vi(x)∣1/2)D(x)=\operatorname{diag}(|v_i(x)|^{1/2})D(x)=diag(∣vi​(x)∣1/2). The first order equation is D(x)2g(x)=0D(x)^2g(x)=0D(x)2g(x)=0. At an interior point, Fig. 11 chooses a scaled Newton direction d^\widehat dd from B^(x)d^=−D(x)g(x)\widehat B(x)\widehat d=-D(x)g(x)B(x)d=−D(x)g(x) and sets d=D(x)d^d=D(x)\widehat dd=D(x)d, where B^(x)\widehat B(x)B(x) is the scaled Hessian plus the diagonal correction in (2.5).

A reflective path px,d(α)p_{x,d}(\alpha)px,d​(α) follows x+αdx+\alpha dx+αd and folds a coordinate back into the box whenever it crosses a finite bound. For a bounded coordinate this folding repeats after later crossings. The accepted value αk\alpha_kαk​ obeys ∣αk−1∣≤χα∥D(xk)2g(xk)∥|\alpha_k-1|\le\chi_\alpha\|D(x_k)^2g(x_k)\|∣αk​−1∣≤χα​∥D(xk​)2g(xk​)∥ and produces another strict interior point. Fig. 11 prints the rule as ∣αk−1∣=O(∥Dkgk∥)|\alpha_k-1|=O(\|D_kg_k\|)∣αk​−1∣=O(∥Dk​gk​∥); the squared scaling is a second disclosed correction, explained below. The iteration is xk+1=xk+pxk,dk(αk)x_{k+1}=x_k+p_{x_k,d_k}(\alpha_k)xk+1​=xk​+pxk​,dk​​(αk​).

At a candidate limit point x∗x_*x∗​, nondegeneracy says that any coordinate with gi(x∗)=0g_i(x_*)=0gi​(x∗​)=0 lies strictly between its bounds. The free coordinates are those strictly between bounds. The second order sufficient conditions used here require that x∗x_*x∗​ is feasible, D(x∗)2g(x∗)=0D(x_*)^2g(x_*)=0D(x∗​)2g(x∗​)=0, and the Hessian quadratic form is positive on every nonzero direction supported on the free coordinates. Section 6 also defines a finite family Fν(x)=diag⁡(ν(x))g(x)F_\nu(x)=\operatorname{diag}(\nu(x))g(x)Fν​(x)=diag(ν(x))g(x) whose allowed coordinate choices come from (6.4). Coleman and Li, pp. 193–194 and 211–213 give these definitions and the local algorithm.

Formalization targets

Finite family and local Newton estimates

The supporting targets establish that the family vanishes at x∗x_*x∗​ and has regular Jacobians there, that a scaled Fig. 11 direction is a Newton step for one family member, and that the reflected displacement is close to that direction. Lemma 12 makes the closeness quantitative at the coordinates that are active at x∗x_*x∗​. Theorem 11 states the corresponding abstract local Newton result for a finite family of maps. These are the five milestones of the mission, ordered from the model and abstract estimate through the step and path estimates.

Quadratic convergence

The goal is the corrected local form of Theorem 13. For a fixed bound χα≥0\chi_\alpha\ge0χα​≥0 on the permitted step size deviation, a common neighborhood and constant work for every Fig. 11 run starting there:

xk∈int⁡(F),∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥2(k≥1),xk⟶x∗.x_k\in\operatorname{int}(\mathcal F),\qquad \|x_{k+1}-x_*\|\le C\|x_k-x_*\|^2\quad(k\ge1), \qquad x_k\longrightarrow x_*.xk​∈int(F),∥xk+1​−x∗​∥≤C∥xk​−x∗​∥2(k≥1),xk​⟶x∗​.

The radius and CCC are chosen before the run. A companion statement asserts that, when χα>0\chi_\alpha>0χα​>0, a nearby interior point begins at least one run satisfying the algorithm's conditions.

Significance

The theorem gives a local rate for a feasible Newton method that can meet and reflect from finite bounds. It connects the behavior of the actual reflected iterates to Newton systems whose Jacobians are regular near x∗x_*x∗​. This matters when the solution is on the boundary: convergence of an unconstrained Newton step by itself says nothing about whether the iterates remain feasible. Theorem 13 is a known paper result, and this mission asks for a machine checked proof of its corrected statement. None of this mission's seven draft theorems has a proof in the proposal; the published box definition is reused as an existing platform object.

The correction is mathematically material. In the one dimensional problem with no finite bounds and f(x)=x2/2+(2/5)∣x∣5/2f(x)=x^2/2+(2/5)|x|^{5/2}f(x)=x2/2+(2/5)∣x∣5/2, the objective is C2C^2C2 and x∗=0x_*=0x∗​=0 meets the paper's nondegeneracy and second order conditions. Fig. 11 with αk=1\alpha_k=1αk​=1 reduces to ordinary Newton iteration, whose error is of order ∣xk∣3/2|x_k|^{3/2}∣xk​∣3/2 rather than ∣xk∣2|x_k|^2∣xk​∣2. The source's proof invokes the Lipschitz Jacobian condition (6.5) of Theorem 11; the goal therefore assumes the Hessian is locally Lipschitz at x∗x_*x∗​. This changes the literal hypotheses of the printed Theorem 13 and is disclosed in each relevant item.

The step-size rule needs a second correction. The proof on p. 212 asserts ∥Dkgk∥=O(∥xk−x∗∥)\|D_kg_k\|=O(\|x_k-x_*\|)∥Dk​gk​∥=O(∥xk​−x∗​∥) and so ∣αk−1∣=O(∥xk−x∗∥)|\alpha_k-1|=O(\|x_k-x_*\|)∣αk​−1∣=O(∥xk​−x∗​∥). On [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with f(x)=xf(x)=xf(x)=x and x∗=0x_*=0x∗​=0, however, D(x)g(x)=xD(x)g(x)=\sqrt xD(x)g(x)=x​, the Newton step is d=−xd=-xd=−x, and αk=1−χαxk\alpha_k=1-\chi_\alpha\sqrt{x_k}αk​=1−χα​xk​​ obeys the printed rule while giving xk+1=χαxk3/2x_{k+1}=\chi_\alpha x_k^{3/2}xk+1​=χα​xk3/2​. The run predicate therefore bounds ∣αk−1∣|\alpha_k-1|∣αk​−1∣ by χα∥D(xk)2g(xk)∥\chi_\alpha\|D(x_k)^2g(x_k)\|χα​∥D(xk​)2g(xk​)∥, which is O(∥xk−x∗∥)O(\|x_k-x_*\|)O(∥xk​−x∗​∥) as the proof needs and is still computable without knowing x∗x_*x∗​. Coleman and Li, Theorems 11 and 13 are the source of the two compared claims.

Difficulty

The scaling changes its coordinate formula when a gradient component changes sign, while the reflective path changes direction at each finite bound. A direct Newton estimate for an unreflected step does not control the displacement taken by Fig. 11. The finite family FνF_\nuFν​ and the active-coordinate breakpoint estimate make the local statement precise across those choices. The abstract rate also needs a uniform regularity estimate for every member of that family. Twice continuous differentiability gives continuity of the Hessian, but it does not supply the linear modulus of continuity needed for a quadratic error bound.

Formalization scope

The variables are Euclidean vectors indexed by Fin(n)\mathrm{Fin}(n)Fin(n); the paper's first iterate x1x_1x1​ is Lean's sequence index zero. Bounds use extended reals, while all distances, derivatives and norms use real Euclidean space. A published definition supplies F\mathcal FF; this mission defines the strict interior, scaling, diagonal Newton correction, reflective map, run, nondegeneracy and second order condition, and the family FνF_\nuFν​. The bounded-interval reflection uses the paper's repeated folding, including steps beyond the first breakpoint. Division in Lemma 12 is accompanied by a nonzero Newton component, and Newton directions are solutions of linear equations rather than values of a possibly undefined inverse.

The paper's standing assumption says that the initial sublevel set is compact and that fff is C2C^2C2 on an open set containing F\mathcal FF. The local statements retain the smoothness clause and omit compactness because no local conclusion uses it. The sole added regularity hypothesis in the goal is local Lipschitz continuity of HHH at x∗x_*x∗​; the run predicate uses the corrected step-size rule ∣αk−1∣≤χα∥D(xk)2g(xk)∥|\alpha_k-1|\le\chi_\alpha\|D(x_k)^2g(x_k)\|∣αk​−1∣≤χα​∥D(xk​)2g(xk​)∥. The existence companion requires χα>0\chi_\alpha>0χα​>0: if it were zero, the only allowed step size could hit a bound exactly. Neither the goal nor the run predicate assumes the iterates are already close after the start, that they converge, or that the scaled step is a Newton step for a chosen FνF_\nuFν​; those are the claims to establish. A feasible interior start is required, so a box with an empty strict interior has no run. Contributions on the general finite family Newton estimate, active-coordinate ratio, reflected path, and existence of interior runs are all directly useful to the goal.

Selected references

  • T. F. Coleman and Y. Li, On the convergence of interior-reflective Newton methods for nonlinear minimization subject to bounds, Mathematical Programming 67 (1994), 189–224. doi:10.1007/BF01582221.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Finding Optimal (s, S) Policies Is About As Simple As Evaluating a Single Policy: The Zheng–Federgruen Algorithm Terminates with an Optimal (s, S) Policy and c⁰ = c*Research Paper

Motivation

The (s, S) policy is the standard control rule for a single item reviewed periodically: when the inventory position reaches or drops below a reorder level sss, order enough to bring it up to the order-up-to level SSS. Under a fixed ordering cost and fairly general holding and shortage costs, some (s, S) policy minimizes the long-run average cost among all policies (Veinott 1966). That makes computing the best (s, S) pair a routine subproblem in inventory software, in multi-echelon heuristics, and in textbooks.

Before 1991 the available methods searched a box of candidate pairs. Veinott and Wagner (1965) bounded the optimal sss and SSS and compared policies within the bounds. Later methods (Johnson, Management Science 15, 1968; Bell, SIAM J. Applied Mathematics 18, 1970; Federgruen and Zipkin 1984) used policy iteration or partial enumeration. Zheng and Federgruen (1991) gave an exact search that walks a monotone staircase path through the (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) grid, and showed it costs about as much as evaluating a single policy. The procedure is the one presented in standard inventory texts such as Zipkin's Foundations of Inventory Management (2000).

Setting

One-period demands DDD are i.i.d. and integer valued, with pj=Pr⁡{D=j}p_j=\Pr\{D=j\}pj​=Pr{D=j}, j≥0j\ge0j≥0, and p0<1p_0<1p0​<1. An order costs K>0K>0K>0. G(y)G(y)G(y) is the one-period expected cost when a period starts at inventory position y∈Zy\in\mathbb Zy∈Z. The paper assumes only:

  • −G-G−G is unimodal: for some integer mmm, GGG is nonincreasing on y≤my\le my≤m and nondecreasing on y≥my\ge my≥m;
  • lim⁡∣y∣→∞G(y)>min⁡yG(y)+K\lim_{|y|\to\infty}G(y)>\min_yG(y)+Klim∣y∣→∞​G(y)>miny​G(y)+K.

Write y1∗y_1^*y1∗​ and y2∗y_2^*y2∗​ for the smallest and largest minimizers of GGG. The renewal density mmm and renewal function MMM are

m(0)=(1−p0)−1,m(j)=∑l=0jpl m(j−l) (j≥1),M(0)=0,M(j)=M(j−1)+m(j−1).m(0)=(1-p_0)^{-1},\quad m(j)=\sum_{l=0}^{j}p_l\,m(j-l)\ (j\ge1),\qquad M(0)=0,\quad M(j)=M(j-1)+m(j-1).m(0)=(1−p0​)−1,m(j)=l=0∑j​pl​m(j−l) (j≥1),M(0)=0,M(j)=M(j−1)+m(j−1).

For integers s<Ss<Ss<S, the long-run average cost of the (s, S) policy is

c(s,S)=K+∑j=0S−s−1m(j) G(S−j)M(S−s).c(s,S)=\frac{K+\sum_{j=0}^{S-s-1}m(j)\,G(S-j)}{M(S-s)}.c(s,S)=M(S−s)K+∑j=0S−s−1​m(j)G(S−j)​.

A pair (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) is an optimal policy if c(s,S)≤c(s′,S′)c(s,S)\le c(s',S')c(s,S)≤c(s′,S′) for all integers s′<S′s'<S's′<S′. The optimal cost c∗c^*c∗ is the value of any optimal policy. For fixed SSS, sss is an optimal reorder level if c(s,S)≤c(s′,S)c(s,S)\le c(s',S)c(s,S)≤c(s′,S) for all s′<Ss'<Ss′<S.

The algorithm (§3, p. 659) starts at any minimizer y∗y^*y∗ of GGG.

  • Step 0. Decrease sss from y∗y^*y∗ until c(s,y∗)≤G(s)c(s,y^*)\le G(s)c(s,y∗)≤G(s). Set S0:=y∗S^0:=y^*S0:=y∗, c0:=c(s,S0)c^0:=c(s,S^0)c0:=c(s,S0) and S:=y∗+1S:=y^*+1S:=y∗+1.
  • Step 1. While G(S)≤c0G(S)\le c^0G(S)≤c0: if c(s,S)<c0c(s,S)<c^0c(s,S)<c0, set S0:=SS^0:=SS0:=S, increase sss while c(s,S0)≤G(s+1)c(s,S^0)\le G(s+1)c(s,S0)≤G(s+1), and set c0:=c(s,S0)c^0:=c(s,S^0)c0:=c(s,S0). In either case, S:=S+1S:=S+1S:=S+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1(a)

For every demand law with p0<1p_0<1p0​<1, every K>0K>0K>0, every GGG satisfying the two assumptions, and every minimizer y∗y^*y∗ of GGG, the algorithm terminates. On termination, with final values s,S0,c0s,S^0,c^0s,S0,c0,

c(s,S0)≤c(s′,S′)  for all integers s′<S′,c0=c(s,S0)=c∗.c(s,S^0)\le c(s',S')\ \text{ for all integers } s'<S',\qquad c^0=c(s,S^0)=c^*.c(s,S0)≤c(s′,S′)  for all integers s′<S′,c0=c(s,S0)=c∗.

Milestones

The milestones are the results the paper's justification of the algorithm (p. 659) rests on, in the order it uses them:

  1. the weighted-average identity (6), c(s−1,S)=αnc(s,S)+(1−αn)G(s)c(s-1,S)=\alpha_nc(s,S)+(1-\alpha_n)G(s)c(s−1,S)=αn​c(s,S)+(1−αn​)G(s) with αn=M(n)/M(n+1)\alpha_n=M(n)/M(n+1)αn​=M(n)/M(n+1) and n=S−sn=S-sn=S−s, and Lemma 0 on the comparisons it implies;
  2. Lemma 1(a): a reorder level s0<y1∗s^0<y_1^*s0<y1∗​ with G(s0)≥c(s0,S)≥G(s0+1)G(s^0)\ge c(s^0,S)\ge G(s^0+1)G(s0)≥c(s0,S)≥G(s0+1) (condition (7)) is optimal for SSS;
  3. Corollary 1, the stopping rule of Step 0;
  4. Lemma 2(a)–(c), the bounds y2∗≤S∗y_2^*\le S^*y2∗​≤S∗ and S∗≤Sˉ∗=max⁡{y≥y2∗:G(y)≤c∗}S^*\le\bar S^*=\max\{y\ge y_2^*:G(y)\le c^*\}S∗≤Sˉ∗=max{y≥y2∗​:G(y)≤c∗}, which give the stopping rule of Step 1;
  5. Lemma 3(a), the single-comparison test for improvement, and Corollary 2(b) with Lemma 3(b), which justify the inner loop.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1(a) makes the exact optimum of the (s, S) problem as cheap to compute as the cost of one policy, for any GGG with −G-G−G unimodal. No convexity is needed, and lead times, random lead times of the Zipkin type, and linear purchase costs are allowed. Its bounds (Lemma 2) and the monotone staircase structure of the search also underlie later work on continuous review, discounting and approximation.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper. As far as we know, none of the results in this mission has a machine-checked proof: the platform's Veinott–Wagner items concern a different (discounted, convex) model. Formalizing it produces a verified correctness proof of a widely implemented algorithm, and checks the paper's lemmas at their edge cases. Two of the printed statements need repair: Lemma 1(b) and Lemma 3(a) (see the scope section).

Difficulty

Optimality is claimed over all pairs s′<S′s'<S's′<S′, an infinite set, but the algorithm visits only a monotone path. The proof therefore has to show that every pair it skips is no better. For a fixed SSS, the skipped reorder levels are handled by the unimodality of c(⋅,S)c(\cdot,S)c(⋅,S) (Lemma 1). The skipped order-up-to levels are handled by the one-comparison test of Lemma 3(a), and those above the stopping point by the bound of Lemma 2(b). An argument from joint convexity or joint unimodality of ccc in (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) is not available. The paper uses no structure of ccc beyond what Lemmas 0–3 state, and these hold only under the side conditions written in them.

Lemma 2(b)'s printed proof leaves the class of (s, S) policies (it uses a randomized order-up-to level). The limit at −∞-\infty−∞ may be finite, so min⁡s<Sc(s,S)\min_{s<S}c(s,S)mins<S​c(s,S) need not be attained for every SSS. Lattice demands, for which mmm vanishes somewhere, create ties between adjacent reorder levels. Each of these breaks a naive transcription of the paper's argument.

Formalization scope

  • Levels s,S,ys,S,ys,S,y are integers. Demand values are natural numbers, and the demand law is the published VeinottWagnerSS.RenewalCost.DemandDist with the extra hypothesis p0<1p_0<1p0​<1. All costs are real.
  • The cost is the ratio above. Equation (1) on p. 655 is misprinted as M(S−s)K+∑⋯M(S-s)K+\sum\cdotsM(S−s)K+∑⋯, and the ratio is the form fixed by (3) and (5). The Lean value c(s,S)c(s,S)c(s,S) for s≥Ss\ge Ss≥S is a junk 000, so every quantifier over reorder levels carries s<Ss<Ss<S.
  • mmm is defined by the solved recursion m(j)=(1−p0)−1∑l=1jpl m(j−l)m(j)=(1-p_0)^{-1}\sum_{l=1}^{j}p_l\,m(j-l)m(j)=(1−p0​)−1∑l=1j​pl​m(j−l) (p. 660), and M(j)=∑i<jm(i)M(j)=\sum_{i<j}m(i)M(j)=∑i<j​m(i).
  • The growth assumption is encoded as: GGG has a minimizer y0y_0y0​ and G(y)>G(y0)+KG(y)>G(y_0)+KG(y)>G(y0​)+K for all but finitely many yyy. Under unimodality this is equivalent to the page's limit condition. It is not strengthened to G→+∞G\to+\inftyG→+∞.
  • Optimality is among (s, S) policies. That an (s, S) policy is optimal among all policies is Veinott (1966) and is neither stated nor used. c∗c^*c∗, c∗(S)c^*(S)c∗(S), yi∗y_i^*yi∗​, Sˉ∗\bar S^*Sˉ∗, Sˉc\bar S_cSˉc​ and s′s's′ are never real infima: they are the cost of a given optimal pair, ∃\exists∃-statements, or binders characterised as least or greatest elements.
  • The algorithm is a step function on the state (s,S,S0,c0,phase)(s,S,S^0,c^0,\text{phase})(s,S,S0,c0,phase) that keeps the paper's order of tests and its weak and strict inequalities. The run with nnn steps returns an output only if the algorithm has terminated.
  • Ruled out as trivializing: comparing only with the pairs the algorithm visits or with a bounded box; assuming termination, or a budget that returns the current state; assuming G→+∞G\to+\inftyG→+∞; leaving c(s,S)c(s,S)c(s,S) unguarded for s≥Ss\ge Ss≥S.
  • Repaired statements. Lemma 3(a) is stated with condition (7) at S0S^0S0 as an extra hypothesis. With s0s^0s0 merely optimal it fails when mmm has a zero: for p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5)p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5)p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5), m(1)=0m(1)=0m(1)=0 and adjacent reorder levels tie. The algorithm always has (7). Lemma 1(b), "an optimal reorder level satisfying (7) exists for every SSS", is false when lim⁡y→−∞G(y)\lim_{y\to-\infty}G(y)limy→−∞​G(y) is finite. An example is D≡2D\equiv2D≡2, K=1K=1K=1, G(0)=5G(0)=5G(0)=5, G(y)=10−0.1⋅2−∣y∣G(y)=10-0.1\cdot2^{-|y|}G(y)=10−0.1⋅2−∣y∣ (y≠0y\neq0y=0), S=1S=1S=1, where no optimal reorder level exists. It is not posed here, and the goal does not depend on it.
  • Not formalized: Theorem 1(b)–(c), the operation counts, which depend on a bookkeeping model described in words; Corollary 3, which the paper notes is not needed for the algorithm; and the variant for a general starting level S0S_0S0​.
  • Welcome contributions: general facts about the discrete renewal density (m≥0m\ge0m≥0, M>0M>0M>0), the identity (6), and lemmas on c(⋅,S)c(\cdot,S)c(⋅,S) that are reusable for related (s, S) and (r, Q) work.

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng and A. Federgruen, Finding Optimal (s, S) Policies Is About As Simple As Evaluating a Single Policy, Operations Research 39(4):654–665, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.39.4.654
  • A. F. Veinott Jr. and H. M. Wagner, Computing Optimal (s, S) Inventory Policies, Management Science 11(5):525–552, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.11.5.525
  • A. F. Veinott Jr., On the Optimality of (s, S) Inventory Policies: New Conditions and a New Proof, SIAM J. Applied Mathematics 14(5):1067–1083, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1137/0114086
  • A. Federgruen and P. Zipkin, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing Optimal (s, S) Policies, Operations Research 32(6):1268–1285, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.32.6.1268
  • A. Federgruen and Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
14 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control 1: The Marginal Conditions on the Convex Hull of Each Item's Decreasing Cost Function Determine a Unique Optimal AllocationResearch Paper

Why marginal allocation needs a convex hull

Service organizations keep repairable spare parts at a depot and at operating bases. Stock has a purchase or holding cost, while insufficient stock leaves backorders. Craig Sherbrooke's METRIC study describes how to evaluate such a system and distribute additional units among item types. Its fifth computational stage compares the reduction in expected backorders from the next unit with the cost of that unit. The comparison is delicate because the backorder function after optimizing the depot–base split can fail to be convex as a function of total item stock, even though a fixed depot-stock version is convex. Sherbrooke therefore introduces a convex extension before applying marginal analysis (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 134–135).

This mission isolates the theorem in the paper's Appendix. It concerns abstract item functions with the properties needed for the allocation rule, so the result can be studied independently of the queueing assumptions and the FORTRAN procedure that produced those functions in METRIC. The paper supplies a proof of the Appendix theorem; the mission seeks a machine-checked formalization of its precise mathematical content (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 140–141).

Setting: stock levels, costs, and the lower boundary

There is a finite collection of items indexed by iii. A decision assigns each item a stock level mi∈Nm_i\in\mathbb Nmi​∈N, where 000 is permitted. Item iii has a unit cost cic_ici​ and a real-valued function Ξi(m)\Xi_i(m)Ξi​(m) representing the backorder contribution associated with stock level mmm. In the METRIC application, Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is obtained after choosing the best allocation of mmm units between depot and bases. The Appendix theorem uses only that Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is nonincreasing and has a finite lower bound. “Decreasing” is read weakly: the paper's justification says that adding a unit “cannot exceed” the backorders at the previous level (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 136).

For a function g:N→Rg:\mathbb N\to\mathbb Rg:N→R, write Δg(m)=g(m+1)−g(m)\Delta g(m)=g(m+1)-g(m)Δg(m)=g(m+1)−g(m). The function is discretely convex when Δg(m+1)≥Δg(m)\Delta g(m+1)\ge\Delta g(m)Δg(m+1)≥Δg(m) at every level. The lower convex hull HiH_iHi​, written Ξi′\Xi_i'Ξi′​ in the paper, is the greatest discretely convex function at or below Ξi\Xi_iΞi​. It follows the lower boundary of the convex hull of the points (m,Ξi(m))(m,\Xi_i(m))(m,Ξi​(m)); a point above that boundary is lowered, while a contact point keeps its original value (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 135–136, 140). The existing ServiceParts.StockLevels.Basic definition supplies Δ\DeltaΔ and Δ2\Delta^2Δ2 for real stock-level functions; this mission reuses it.

The original objective is the separable sum

J(m)=∑i(cimi+Ξi(mi)).J(m)=\sum_i\bigl(c_i m_i+\Xi_i(m_i)\bigr).J(m)=i∑​(ci​mi​+Ξi​(mi​)).

For each item, conditions (12) select the first level mˉi\bar m_imˉi​ where adding another unit no longer lowers the convexified cost:

ci+Hi(mˉi+1)−Hi(mˉi)≥0,mˉi>0⟹ci+Hi(mˉi)−Hi(mˉi−1)<0.c_i+H_i(\bar m_i+1)-H_i(\bar m_i)\ge0,\qquad \bar m_i>0\Longrightarrow c_i+H_i(\bar m_i)-H_i(\bar m_i-1)<0.ci​+Hi​(mˉi​+1)−Hi​(mˉi​)≥0,mˉi​>0⟹ci​+Hi​(mˉi​)−Hi​(mˉi​−1)<0.

The second condition is automatic at mˉi=0\bar m_i=0mˉi​=0, following the paper's convention Hi(−1)=+∞H_i(-1)=+\inftyHi​(−1)=+∞ (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 140, Eqs. (11)–(12)).

Formalization targets

The Appendix goal is that each item's conditions (12) have exactly one solution and that the vector formed from those solutions minimizes the original, possibly nonconvex objective:

∀i  ∃!mˉi∈N satisfying (12),J(mˉ)≤J(m)for every m∈NI.\forall i\;\exists!\bar m_i\in\mathbb N\text{ satisfying (12)}, \qquad J(\bar m)\le J(m)\quad\text{for every }m\in\mathbb N^I.∀i∃!mˉi​∈N satisfying (12),J(mˉ)≤J(m)for every m∈NI.

The milestone list follows the Appendix's claims: the lower boundary is a convex minorant; its marginal changes approach zero; (12) has a solution and that solution is unique; it minimizes the convexified single-item cost; and the selected level is a contact point where Hi(mˉi)=Ξi(mˉi)H_i(\bar m_i)=\Xi_i(\bar m_i)Hi​(mˉi​)=Ξi​(mˉi​). The final comparison is with JJJ, not just with the objective formed from HiH_iHi​ (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 140–141).

What the result establishes

The theorem licenses the paper's marginal allocation rule even when an item's original backorder function has nonconvex points. The rule can use a convex lower boundary to identify a level, yet the resulting allocation is optimal for the original function. Without the contact-point conclusion, optimality of the modified objective alone would not give that guarantee. The theorem is stated for any finite number of independent items with the listed properties, so it is reusable beyond the specific depot–base model (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 134–136, 140–141).

The paper proves the result informally. This mission's definitions and theorem statements compile locally as open Lean goals; they do not yet constitute a machine-checked proof. A related published Prove2Me result, ServiceParts.Allocation.allocOpt_correct, proves correctness of an allocation algorithm for piecewise-linear functions assumed convex. It does not address the convexification or contact claim here. The platform's posed ServiceParts.StockLevels.optimal_stock_criterion and greedy_fill_rate_optimal concern other marginal criteria and likewise do not settle this Appendix theorem. A successful development would provide reusable Lean infrastructure for lower convex envelopes of integer sequences, their forward differences, and separable finite allocations.

Difficulty

A one-step marginal comparison on the raw Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ is insufficient when its forward differences can fall and then rise: an apparent local stopping point need not minimize the full sequence. Replacing Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ by a convex minorant restores ordered marginal changes, but a minimizer of a smaller function need not minimize the original function. The central burden is therefore the exact relation between the lower boundary and the original points at a level selected by the strict condition in (12). Ties in the objective add a second precision issue: the selected level is unique under the rule even when the objective has more than one minimizer (Sherbrooke 1968, pp. 135, 140–141).

Formalization scope and conventions

Stock levels are natural numbers, item contributions and costs are real, and the item type is finite; the empty item type is allowed, making both the sum and the coordinatewise statement trivial. The functions Ξi\Xi_iΞi​ are nonincreasing and bounded below, as in the Appendix. The lower hull is a pointwise real supremum over all discretely convex minorants. Its defining family is nonempty and bounded at each point under the lower-bound hypothesis, which every hull theorem carries. The hull is therefore fixed by the input function rather than supplied as an arbitrary minorant. The goal compares every vector in NI\mathbb N^INI, without a budget restriction. The formalization does not use a default value for Hi(−1)H_i(-1)Hi​(−1): the predecessor condition applies only to positive stock levels.

The paper prints ci≥0c_i\ge0ci​≥0 with at least one positive cost. Its existence assertion fails when a particular ci=0c_i=0ci​=0: for Ξi(m)=1/(m+1)\Xi_i(m)=1/(m+1)Ξi​(m)=1/(m+1), a bounded, decreasing, convex sequence, the first inequality of (12) never holds. The goal and existence milestone therefore require ci>0c_i>0ci​>0 for every present item. The paper's phrase “unique optimizing” is interpreted as uniqueness of the stock vector determined by (12), together with its optimality. It cannot assert uniqueness among all minimizers: with c=1c=1c=1, Ξ(0)=1\Xi(0)=1Ξ(0)=1, and Ξ(m)=0\Xi(m)=0Ξ(m)=0 for m≥1m\ge1m≥1, levels 000 and 111 tie. The proof's own wording identifies (12) as the unique selection rule (Sherbrooke 1968, p. 140).

The formalization contains separate definitions for discrete convexity, the greatest lower hull, conditions (12), and objective (11). It welcomes proofs and general lemmas about convex integer sequences and finite separable sums. The METRIC computation, empirical Air Force data, equations (7)–(9), and the discussion of Lagrangian versus combinatorial solutions are context rather than goals of this mission. A definition that simply sets Hi=ΞiH_i=\Xi_iHi​=Ξi​, or a conclusion that minimizes only the hull objective, would omit the theorem's content.

Selected references

  • Craig C. Sherbrooke, METRIC: A Multi-Echelon Technique for Recoverable Item Control, Operations Research 16(1), 122–141, 1968. DOI: 10.1287/opre.16.1.122.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 3: Under Second-Order Conditions, Tolerances αₖ ≤ q[sup g_r − g_r(yᵏ)] Give |xᵏ − x̄| ≤ s|yᵏ − ȳ|Research Paper

Motivation

The method of multipliers (augmented Lagrangian method), proposed independently by Hestenes and Powell in 1969, solves a constrained optimization problem by a sequence of unconstrained minimizations of a penalized Lagrangian, updating a multiplier estimate between them. It became one of the standard algorithms of nonlinear programming and is the ancestor of ADMM and of the proximal-point view of dual methods. Rockafellar's 1973 paper (Math. Programming 5, 354–373) extended the method to inequality constraints with the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​ and reinterpreted it as unconstrained maximization of a smooth concave dual function grg_rgr​. Its §4 shows that primal points recovered from any maximizing dual sequence are asymptotically minimizing; its §5, the subject of this mission, asks how fast they converge.

Timeline. 1969: Hestenes and Powell introduce multiplier methods for equality constraints. 1973: Rockafellar treats inequality constraints in the convex case through LrL_rLr​ and its dual (this paper), and in the same year applies the multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell to convex programming (J. Optim. Theory Appl. 12). 1976: Rockafellar's "Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming" (Math. Oper. Res. 1) gives the general convergence theory.

Setting

Let X⊂RnX \subset \mathbb R^nX⊂Rn be convex and f0,f1,…,fm:X→Rf_0, f_1, \dots, f_m : X \to \mathbb Rf0​,f1​,…,fm​:X→R convex. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],x∈X, y∈Rm,L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r}\sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big], \qquad x \in X,\ y \in \mathbb R^m,Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],x∈X, y∈Rm,

and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y) over all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm; sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ is its supremum. A maximizing sequence is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​. The dual method of Theorem 4.1 takes a bounded maximizing sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and, for each kkk, a point xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X that minimizes Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk) to within a tolerance αk\alpha_kαk​:

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.(4.7)L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0. \qquad (4.7)Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.(4.7)

The standing assumptions of §5 concern a point xˉ∈int⁡X\bar x \in \operatorname{int} Xxˉ∈intX that is an optimal solution of (P), near which f0,…,fmf_0, \dots, f_mf0​,…,fm​ are twice continuously differentiable, and a multiplier vector yˉ\bar yyˉ​ satisfying with xˉ\bar xxˉ the Kuhn–Tucker conditions (yˉi≥0\bar y_i \ge 0yˉ​i​≥0, fi(xˉ)≤0f_i(\bar x) \le 0fi​(xˉ)≤0, yˉifi(xˉ)=0\bar y_i f_i(\bar x) = 0yˉ​i​fi​(xˉ)=0, and xˉ\bar xxˉ minimizes f0+∑iyˉifif_0 + \sum_i \bar y_i f_if0​+∑i​yˉ​i​fi​ over XXX). With I={i:fi(xˉ)=0}I = \{i : f_i(\bar x) = 0\}I={i:fi​(xˉ)=0} the active set and H(x,y)=∇2f0(x)+∑i∈Iyi∇2fi(x)H(x, y) = \nabla^2 f_0(x) + \sum_{i \in I} y_i \nabla^2 f_i(x)H(x,y)=∇2f0​(x)+∑i∈I​yi​∇2fi​(x), they are: (i) yˉi≠0\bar y_i \ne 0yˉ​i​=0 for i∈Ii \in Ii∈I; (ii) the ∇fi(xˉ)\nabla f_i(\bar x)∇fi​(xˉ), i∈Ii \in Ii∈I, are linearly independent; (iii) z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ)z>0z \cdot H(\bar x, \bar y) z > 0z⋅H(xˉ,yˉ​)z>0 for every nonzero zzz with z⋅∇fi(xˉ)=0z \cdot \nabla f_i(\bar x) = 0z⋅∇fi​(xˉ)=0 for all i∈Ii \in Ii∈I.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 5.3

Under the standing assumptions, with {yk},{xk},{αk}\{y^k\}, \{x^k\}, \{\alpha_k\}{yk},{xk},{αk​} as in (4.7), if for some q>0q > 0q>0

αk≤q [sup⁡gr−gr(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)\alpha_k \le q\,[\sup g_r - g_r(y^k)] \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k, \qquad (5.18)αk​≤q[supgr​−gr​(yk)]for all sufficiently large k,(5.18)

then there is a constant s>0s > 0s>0 with

∣xk−xˉ∣≤s ∣yk−yˉ∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)|x^k - \bar x| \le s\,|y^k - \bar y| \quad \text{for all sufficiently large } k. \qquad (5.19)∣xk−xˉ∣≤s∣yk−yˉ​∣for all sufficiently large k.(5.19)

No rate for {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is fixed: the statement compares the primal error with the dual error, whatever method produces the dual sequence.

Milestones

  1. xˉ\bar xxˉ is the unique optimal solution to (P) and yˉ\bar yyˉ​ the unique optimal solution to the ordinary dual (D0)(D_0)(D0​) and every (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) for r>0r > 0r>0 (§5, after (5.1)).
  2. Theorem 5.1 (i)–(iii): for every r,β>0r, \beta > 0r,β>0 there are ε,α>0\varepsilon, \alpha > 0ε,α>0 such that sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε and Lr(x,y)−gr(y)≤αL_r(x, y) - g_r(y) \le \alphaLr​(x,y)−gr​(y)≤α force (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) into a β\betaβ-neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​) with x∈int⁡Xx \in \operatorname{int} Xx∈intX, where LrL_rLr​ is C2C^2C2, given locally by (5.4), and ∇x2Lr(x,y)\nabla_x^2 L_r(x, y)∇x2​Lr​(x,y) is positive definite.
  3. Theorem 5.1 (iv): the unique minimizer ξ(y)\xi(y)ξ(y) of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX is C1C^1C1 in yyy with derivative (5.5).
  4. Theorem 5.1 (v): grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with negative definite Hessian (5.6)–(5.7).
  5. Corollary 5.2 (5.14): xk→xˉx^k \to \bar xxk→xˉ and yk→yˉy^k \to \bar yyk→yˉ​.
  6. Corollary 5.2 (5.15)–(5.17): a∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αka|x^k - \xi(y^k)|^2 \le \alpha_ka∣xk−ξ(yk)∣2≤αk​, b1∣yk−yˉ∣I≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2∣yk−yˉ∣Ib_1|y^k - \bar y|_I \le |\xi(y^k) - \bar x| \le b_2|y^k - \bar y|_Ib1​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​≤∣ξ(yk)−xˉ∣≤b2​∣yk−yˉ​∣I​, and c1∣yk−yˉ∣2≤gr(yˉ)−gr(yk)≤c2∣yk−yˉ∣2c_1|y^k - \bar y|^2 \le g_r(\bar y) - g_r(y^k) \le c_2|y^k - \bar y|^2c1​∣yk−yˉ​∣2≤gr​(yˉ​)−gr​(yk)≤c2​∣yk−yˉ​∣2.

Significance

Corollary 5.3 is the paper's answer to the practical question of how accurately each inner minimization must be done. A tolerance proportional to the current dual gap costs nothing in the order of convergence: the primal iterates then converge at least as fast as the dual ones. Since grg_rgr​ is C2C^2C2 with a negative definite Hessian near yˉ\bar yyˉ​ (Theorem 5.1 (v)), any locally linearly or superlinearly convergent unconstrained method applied to grg_rgr​ yields a primal sequence with the same rate. The estimates (5.15)–(5.17) are the quantitative bridge between inner accuracy, dual error and primal error, and reappear in later analyses of inexact augmented Lagrangian methods.

The results are proved in the paper (1973) and in textbook treatments; none of them has a machine-checked proof on this platform or in Mathlib. The mission produces a formal statement of the second-order theory of the penalty Lagrangian: the local smooth structure of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​, the implicit minimizer map ξ\xiξ, and the rate comparison. Complete formal proofs of each milestone are the remaining work.

Difficulty

The obvious argument linearizes everything at (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), but LrL_rLr​ is only C1C^1C1 globally: θ2\theta^2θ2 has a kink in its second derivative, so smoothness of LrL_rLr​ must first be established on a neighborhood of (xˉ,yˉ)(\bar x, \bar y)(xˉ,yˉ​), using complementary slackness and strict complementarity (i) to fix which branch of (2.4) each constraint follows. The sequence {(xk,yk)}\{(x^k, y^k)\}{(xk,yk)} is not assumed to converge; localizing it into that neighborhood requires the uniform statement of Theorem 5.1 (i) (with ε,α\varepsilon, \alphaε,α chosen after r,βr, \betar,β) and the uniqueness of xˉ\bar xxˉ and yˉ\bar yyˉ​. The minimizer map ξ\xiξ then comes from the implicit function theorem applied to ∇xLr(x,y)=0\nabla_x L_r(x, y) = 0∇x​Lr​(x,y)=0, and the formula for ∇2gr\nabla^2 g_r∇2gr​ needs the derivative of the envelope gr(y)=Lr(ξ(y),y)g_r(y) = L_r(\xi(y), y)gr​(y)=Lr​(ξ(y),y).

Formalization scope

  • Spaces. Primal points lie in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), multipliers in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m); constraint indices are Fin m (0-based), and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument.
  • Functions. The fif_ifi​ are total functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn; convexity is assumed on XXX only (ConvexOn ℝ X, an explicit hypothesis of every theorem, the paper's standing assumption of p. 358), and twice continuous differentiability only on a neighborhood of xˉ\bar xxˉ. Smoothness of LrL_rLr​ and grg_rgr​ is always a conclusion, never a hypothesis.
  • Extended values. g0g_0g0​, grg_rgr​, sup⁡gr\sup g_rsupgr​ and the infimum in (P) are computed in EReal, so (4.7), (5.2), (5.3) and (5.18) are differences in [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞]; r>0r > 0r>0 is explicit for the penalty Lagrangian, while L0L_0L0​ is defined separately.
  • Derivatives. Hessians are quadratic forms z⋅D(∇φ)(x)zz \cdot D(\nabla\varphi)(x) zz⋅D(∇φ)(x)z; every inverse matrix appears together with positive definiteness of the same matrix, so Lean's convention that a non-invertible map has inverse 000 never applies. Local identities such as (5.4) are stated as equality on a neighborhood, not globally.
  • Choices. The assumption of Theorem 4.1 that the asymptotic optimal value is finite is omitted because it holds under the §5 assumptions. "Generated as in Theorem 4.1" is spelled out as its hypotheses. In (5.15)–(5.17), ξ\xiξ is any function that picks a minimizer of Lr(⋅,y)L_r(\cdot, y)Lr​(⋅,y) over XXX whenever one exists; along yky^kyk it eventually coincides with the paper's unique minimizer. In (iv) and (v), the conclusions are stated for every yyy with sup⁡gr−gr(y)≤ε\sup g_r - g_r(y) \le \varepsilonsupgr​−gr​(y)≤ε, since they do not depend on xxx.
  • Ruled out. The goal does not assume that xkx^kxk or yky^kyk converge, nor that yk≠yˉy^k \ne \bar yyk=yˉ​, and s>0s > 0s>0 is one constant valid for all large kkk; a formalization assuming convergence, or one with an unsatisfiable second-order hypothesis, would be trivial. The standing assumptions and all sequence hypotheses are satisfiable (checked on f0(x)=∣x∣2f_0(x) = |x|^2f0​(x)=∣x∣2, f1(x)=1−e⋅xf_1(x) = 1 - e\cdot xf1​(x)=1−e⋅x in R1\mathbb R^1R1).
  • Infrastructure. The proofs need the implicit function theorem (Mathlib's Analysis/Calculus/Implicit), second derivatives of compositions, envelope differentiation, and the quadratic-growth estimates of a C2C^2C2 function with definite Hessian. Results on Hessian forms and on strict complementarity are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 2: The Dual Supremum Equals the Lower Limit of the Perturbed Infimum, sup (P*) = lim inf_{z→0} inf (P(z))Research Paper

Motivation

A convex minimization problem comes with a dual maximization problem, and the dual value never exceeds the primal value. When the two values differ, a duality gap occurs. Dual bounds, Lagrangian relaxations and optimality certificates are then weaker than hoped. Conditions that rule the gap out are constraint qualifications such as Slater's condition and Rockafellar's notion of a stably set problem. Such conditions say when the gap vanishes, but not what the dual value is when it does not.

R. T. Rockafellar's 1967 paper answers that question for the Fenchel-type pair of problems built from a convex function, a concave function and a continuous linear map between infinite-dimensional spaces. Its Theorem 6 (§6, "Weak duality theorems", pp. 179–180) "explains the exact way in which inf (P) and sup (P*) can fail to be equal", by expressing the dual value through the primal problem alone: the dual supremum is the lower limit of the optimal values of slightly perturbed primal problems. This perturbational view of duality was later developed in Rockafellar's Conjugate Duality and Optimization (1974). It underlies the modern treatment of value functions in convex optimization.

Setting

Two real vector spaces EEE and E∗E^*E∗ are topologically paired when each carries a locally convex Hausdorff topology, they are in duality under a bilinear form ⟨x,x∗⟩\langle x,x^*\rangle⟨x,x∗⟩ that is continuous in each variable, and every continuous linear functional on either space is the pairing with exactly one element of the other. Let (E,E∗)(E,E^*)(E,E∗) and (F,F∗)(F,F^*)(F,F∗) be two such pairs. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear and A∗:F∗→E∗A^*:F^*\to E^*A∗:F∗→E∗ its adjoint, the continuous linear map with ⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩\langle Ax,y^*\rangle=\langle x,A^*y^*\rangle⟨Ax,y∗⟩=⟨x,A∗y∗⟩.

A function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] is convex when its epigraph {(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)}\{(x,\mu)\mid\mu\in\mathbb R,\ \mu\ge f(x)\}{(x,μ)∣μ∈R, μ≥f(x)} is convex in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R. It is proper when it never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere. A function ggg is proper concave when −g-g−g is convex, ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞, and ggg is finite somewhere. The standing hypotheses are that fff is lower semicontinuous proper convex on EEE and ggg is upper semicontinuous proper concave on FFF. Their conjugates are

f∗(x∗)=sup⁡x{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.f^*(x^*)=\sup_{x}\{\langle x,x^*\rangle-f(x)\},\qquad g^*(y^*)=\inf_{y}\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-g(y)\}.f∗(x∗)=xsup​{⟨x,x∗⟩−f(x)},g∗(y∗)=yinf​{⟨y,y∗⟩−g(y)}.

The primal problem (P) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over x∈Ex\in Ex∈E. The dual problem (P*) is to maximize g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) over y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗. For z∈Fz\in Fz∈F the perturbed problem (P(zzz)) is to minimize f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z). Its value defines the perturbation function

h(z)=inf⁡(P(z))=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf(\mathrm P(z))=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(\mathrm P).h(z)=inf(P(z))=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The lower semicontinuous hull of hhh is hˉ(y)=lim inf⁡z→yh(z)\bar h(y)=\liminf_{z\to y}h(z)hˉ(y)=liminfz→y​h(z), where z=yz=yz=y is allowed, so that hˉ≤h\bar h\le hhˉ≤h. All infima and suprema are taken in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

sup⁡(P∗)=lim inf⁡z→0 [inf⁡(P(z))],\sup(\mathrm P^*)=\liminf_{z\to 0}\,[\inf(\mathrm P(z))],sup(P∗)=z→0liminf​[inf(P(z))],

valid except in the trivial case where the left side is −∞-\infty−∞ and the right side is +∞+\infty+∞. No consistency, constraint qualification or attainment is assumed, and neither side need be finite. The exception is exactly the stated conjunction. A version assuming (P) consistent would be weaker, since an inconsistent (P), with h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, may still have a finite lower limit.

Milestones: the four claims of the proof (p. 180)

  1. hˉ\bar hhˉ is a lower semicontinuous convex function on FFF.
  2. For every y∗∈F∗y^*\in F^*y∗∈F∗, with hˉ∗(y∗)=sup⁡y{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)}\bar h^*(y^*)=\sup_y\{\langle y,y^*\rangle-\bar h(y)\}hˉ∗(y∗)=supy​{⟨y,y∗⟩−hˉ(y)},
−hˉ∗(y∗)=inf⁡y{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=inf⁡z{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).-\bar h^*(y^*)=\inf_y\{\bar h(y)-\langle y,y^*\rangle\}=\inf_z\{h(z)-\langle z,y^*\rangle\}=g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*).−hˉ∗(y∗)=yinf​{hˉ(y)−⟨y,y∗⟩}=zinf​{h(z)−⟨z,y∗⟩}=g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗).
  1. (6.2): if hˉ\bar hhˉ is proper, then hˉ(0)=sup⁡y∗{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}\bar h(0)=\sup_{y^*}\{\langle 0,y^*\rangle-\bar h^*(y^*)\}hˉ(0)=supy∗​{⟨0,y∗⟩−hˉ∗(y∗)}.
  2. If hˉ\bar hhˉ is not proper, the maximand g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗) of (P*) is identically −∞-\infty−∞.

The paper's Lemma 2 (convexity of hhh) is used by the first claim. It is a milestone of the companion mission on Theorem 3 of the same paper and is not restated here.

Significance

Theorem 6 reduces every question about the dual value to a question about the primal value function near the origin. Strong duality inf⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)\inf(\mathrm P)=\sup(\mathrm P^*)inf(P)=sup(P∗) holds exactly when hhh is lower semicontinuous at 000 (outside the trivial case). A duality gap is exactly a downward jump of hhh at 000. The dual of (P*) obeys the same formula, which the paper uses to derive Theorem 7 on normal problems. An integer-lattice analogue appears in discrete convex analysis (Murota, Theorem 8.53, whose duality relation is already stated on Prove2Me as DiscreteConvex.ConjugacyDualityD.general_duality_relations). That statement has no topology and is not the same theorem.

The result is classical and its proof is published. As far as the platform's index shows, no machine-checked statement of it exists in the paper's generality, nor a statement of extended-real biconjugation on general paired locally convex spaces. The value of the mission is a formal proof in the paper's setting: arbitrary topologically paired spaces, extended-real-valued functions, and both the proper and the improper case of the hull. The biconjugation milestone (6.2) and the hull lemma are reusable for other perturbational duality results.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares h(0)h(0)h(0) with the dual objective directly. It cannot give the theorem, because hhh may jump at 000, and the dual objective does not detect the value of hhh at a single point: the target is a lower limit, not a value. In infinite dimensions, conjugacy recovers a function only when it is lower semicontinuous and convex for a topology compatible with the pairing, so the statement depends on the full compatibility of the pairing on FFF, not on a norm. The usual statements of biconjugation cover proper functions only, whereas here the lower limit may take both values ±∞\pm\infty±∞, and both cases of the theorem must be covered. Finally, extended-real arithmetic must be tracked so that the dual objective, defined from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗, is matched in every infinite case.

Formalization scope

Values lie in EReal. Infima and suprema are complete-lattice ⨅ and ⨆, so an empty or unbounded family gives ±∞\pm\infty±∞ as in the paper. The lower limit is Filter.liminf h (nhds y) over the full neighbourhood filter: a punctured limit would change the theorem. Convexity is epigraph convexity in E×RE\times\mathbb RE×R, and properness is the paper's two-sided condition. A topological pairing is a structure holding a bilinear map, separate continuity, and existence and uniqueness of representing elements in both directions. No norm, inner product or finite dimension is assumed. The adjoint A∗A^*A∗ is continuous linear data satisfying the adjoint identity. The conjugates f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ are defined by the paper's formulas from fff, ggg, so their regularity is a consequence, not a hypothesis. Properness of fff and ggg excludes the form (+∞)−(+∞)(+\infty)-(+\infty)(+∞)−(+∞) from f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z) and from g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗)g^*(y^*)-f^*(A^*y^*)g∗(y∗)−f∗(A∗y∗). No statement is repaired relative to the page.

The dual value is the supremum of the maximand built from f∗f^*f∗, g∗g^*g∗ and A∗A^*A∗ as on p. 172. Defining sup⁡(P∗)\sup(\mathrm P^*)sup(P∗) through hˉ\bar hhˉ (for instance as the biconjugate of hˉ\bar hhˉ at 000) would make Theorem 6 true by definition and is ruled out.

A complete development needs extended-real conjugates on paired spaces, the lower semicontinuous hull and the closure of a convex epigraph, and Fenchel–Moreau for proper lower semicontinuous convex functions on a locally convex space. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and lemmas toward Fenchel–Moreau in this generality, are welcome contributions.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific J. Math. 21 (1967), 167–187. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167
  • W. Fenchel, On conjugate convex functions, Canad. J. Math. 1 (1949), 73–77. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1949-007-x
  • A. Brøndsted, Conjugate convex functions in topological vector spaces, Mat.-Fys. Medd. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. 34 (1964) (reference [2] of the paper; no DOI).
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes en dualité, multigraph, Séminaires de Mathématique, Faculté des Sciences, Université de Montpellier, 1962 (reference [12] of the paper; no DOI).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, CBMS-NSF Regional Conference Series in Applied Mathematics 16, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003, Theorem 8.53. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Approach to Solving Nonlinear Programming Problems by Unconstrained Optimization 1: Approximate Minimizers of L_r(·, yᵏ) along a Bounded Maximizing Dual Sequence Are Asymptotically MinimizingResearch Paper

Motivation

Constrained convex programs are routinely solved by turning them into a sequence of unconstrained problems. The classical route is the ordinary Lagrangian L0(x,y)=f0(x)+∑iyifi(x)L_0(x, y) = f_0(x) + \sum_i y_i f_i(x)L0​(x,y)=f0​(x)+∑i​yi​fi​(x), whose dual function g0g_0g0​ is in general nonsmooth and equal to −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant y≥0y \ge 0y≥0, so maximizing it requires a constrained, nonsmooth method. In 1969 Hestenes (JOTA 4, 1969) and Powell (in Optimization, ed. Fletcher, Academic Press, 1969) proposed the method of multipliers for equality constraints, which adds a quadratic penalty to the Lagrangian. Rockafellar's paper (Math. Programming 5, 1973) gives the inequality-constrained version, the penalty Lagrangian LrL_rLr​, and shows that for convex programs its dual is a smooth, unconstrained, concave maximization problem with the same solutions and value as the ordinary dual. The method of multipliers built on this Lagrangian, now called the augmented Lagrangian method, underlies ADMM and many large-scale solvers.

Timeline. Hestenes and Powell (1969): multiplier method for equality constraints. Rockafellar (1973, this paper; and JOTA 12, 1973): the inequality-constrained penalty Lagrangian, its duality theory, and convergence of the multiplier method for convex programs. Rockafellar (Math. Oper. Res. 1, 1976): the method of multipliers identified as the proximal point algorithm applied to the dual. Bertsekas (Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, 1982): the general nonconvex theory.

This mission covers the first half of the paper: the duality theory of LrL_rLr​ (§3) and the theorem that maximizing the penalty dual yields asymptotically optimal primal sequences (§4, Theorem 4.1).

Setting

Let XXX be a nonempty convex subset of a real vector space EEE and f0,f1,…,fmf_0, f_1, \dots, f_mf0​,f1​,…,fm​ convex real functions on XXX. The problem is

(P)minimize f0(x) over x∈X subject to fi(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.\text{(P)}\qquad \text{minimize } f_0(x) \text{ over } x \in X \text{ subject to } f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = 1, \dots, m.(P)minimize f0​(x) over x∈X subject to fi​(x)≤0, i=1,…,m.

Multipliers yyy range over Rm\mathbb R^mRm, with Euclidean norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ and inner product u⋅yu \cdot yu⋅y. With θ(t)=max⁡{0,t}\theta(t) = \max\{0, t\}θ(t)=max{0,t} and a parameter r>0r > 0r>0, the penalty Lagrangian is

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+14r∑i=1m[θ(yi+2rfi(x))2−yi2],L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \frac{1}{4r} \sum_{i=1}^m \big[\theta(y_i + 2 r f_i(x))^2 - y_i^2\big],Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+4r1​i=1∑m​[θ(yi​+2rfi​(x))2−yi2​],

defined for all y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm with no sign restriction. The dual function is gr(y)=inf⁡x∈XLr(x,y)g_r(y) = \inf_{x \in X} L_r(x, y)gr​(y)=infx∈X​Lr​(x,y), and the dual problem (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) maximizes grg_rgr​ over Rm\mathbb R^mRm; g0g_0g0​ and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) are the same with L0L_0L0​, and sup⁡g0\sup g_0supg0​ is the dual optimal value. In Lean these objects are Lr, L0, gr, g0, dualValue, and Fr is the perturbed objective Fr(x,u)=f0(x)+r∣u∣2F_r(x, u) = f_0(x) + r|u|^2Fr​(x,u)=f0​(x)+r∣u∣2 if u≥f(x)u \ge f(x)u≥f(x), +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

A sequence {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} in XXX is asymptotically feasible if lim sup⁡kfi(xk)≤0\limsup_k f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupk​fi​(xk)≤0 for every iii. The asymptotic optimal value (asympValue) is the infimum of lim sup⁡kf0(xk)\limsup_k f_0(x^k)limsupk​f0​(xk) over asymptotically feasible sequences, and a sequence attaining it is asymptotically minimizing (IsAsympMinimizing). A maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) is a sequence {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} with gr(yk)→sup⁡grg_r(y^k) \to \sup g_rgr​(yk)→supgr​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

Suppose the asymptotic optimal value in (P) is finite, r>0r > 0r>0, {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} is a bounded maximizing sequence for (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​), and xk∈Xx^k \in Xxk∈X satisfies

Lr(xk,yk)−gr(yk)≤αk,αk→0.L_r(x^k, y^k) - g_r(y^k) \le \alpha_k, \qquad \alpha_k \to 0.Lr​(xk,yk)−gr​(yk)≤αk​,αk​→0.

Then {xk}\{x^k\}{xk} is asymptotically minimizing for (P).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1: Lr(x,y)=min⁡u{Fr(x,u)+u⋅y}L_r(x, y) = \min_u \{F_r(x, u) + u \cdot y\}Lr​(x,y)=minu​{Fr​(x,u)+u⋅y}; LrL_rLr​ is convex in xxx and concave in yyy.
  2. Theorem 3.2: gr(y)=max⁡z{g0(z)−14r∣z−y∣2}g_r(y) = \max_z \{g_0(z) - \frac{1}{4r}|z - y|^2\}gr​(y)=maxz​{g0​(z)−4r1​∣z−y∣2}; (Dr)(D_r)(Dr​) and (D0)(D_0)(D0​) have the same supremum and optimal solutions; if g0≢−∞g_0 \not\equiv -\inftyg0​≡−∞, grg_rgr​ is finite and C1C^1C1 with ∂gr/∂yi=max⁡{−yi/2r,fi(x)}\partial g_r/\partial y_i = \max\{-y_i/2r, f_i(x)\}∂gr​/∂yi​=max{−yi​/2r,fi​(x)} at any xxx attaining gr(y)g_r(y)gr​(y).
  3. Corollary 3.3: gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)≥gr(y′)≥gr(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr(y)−14r∣y′−y∣2g_r(y) + (y' - y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) \ge g_r(y') \ge g_r(y) + (y'-y)\cdot\nabla g_r(y) - \frac{1}{4r}|y'-y|^2gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)≥gr​(y′)≥gr​(y)+(y′−y)⋅∇gr​(y)−4r1​∣y′−y∣2.
  4. §4 (p. 364): the asymptotic optimal value equals the dual optimal value when the latter is not −∞-\infty−∞ or asymptotically feasible sequences exist.
  5. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3: r∣∇gr(y)∣2≤sup⁡gr−gr(y)r|\nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \sup g_r - g_r(y)r∣∇gr​(y)∣2≤supgr​−gr​(y), and r∣∇yLr(x,y)−∇gr(y)∣2≤αr|\nabla_y L_r(x, y) - \nabla g_r(y)|^2 \le \alphar∣∇y​Lr​(x,y)−∇gr​(y)∣2≤α under (4.7).
  6. (4.9)–(4.11): u↦F0(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2u \mapsto F_0(x, u) + u \cdot y + r|u|^2u↦F0​(x,u)+u⋅y+r∣u∣2 has the unique minimizer ∇yLr(x,y)\nabla_y L_r(x, y)∇y​Lr​(x,y).

Significance

Theorem 4.1 says that any procedure that drives the smooth, unconstrained dual grg_rgr​ to its supremum, while computing Lr(⋅,yk)L_r(\cdot, y^k)Lr​(⋅,yk)-minimizers only approximately, produces an asymptotically optimal primal sequence. It needs no constraint qualification, no existence of a dual or primal optimal solution, and not even feasibility of (P): only that the asymptotic optimal value is finite. Together with Theorem 3.2 it justifies the multiplier method as a dual ascent on a C1C^1C1 concave function with Lipschitz gradient, and it is the starting point of the convergence theory of augmented Lagrangian methods.

None of these statements is formalized on Prove2Me or in Mathlib, which has Lagrangian duality only in special forms and no theory of the penalty Lagrangian or of asymptotic optimal values. The Qi–Sun augmented Lagrangian items on the platform (NonsmoothNewton.AugLagrangian.*) use the (r/2)(r/2)(r/2)-scaled function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and concern smoothness in (x,y)(x, y)(x,y), not the dual function. The results of this paper are classical and proved; this mission formalizes them.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the primal iterates with a saddle point: if yˉ\bar yyˉ​ is a dual optimal solution and (P) is normal, approximate minimizers of Lr(⋅,yˉ)L_r(\cdot, \bar y)Lr​(⋅,yˉ​) are approximately optimal. Theorem 4.1 assumes neither. The function grg_rgr​ need not attain its supremum, (P) need not be normal or even feasible, and there may be no Kuhn–Tucker vector, so there is no saddle point to compare with; the only data are the dual values gr(yk)g_r(y^k)gr​(yk), the boundedness of {yk}\{y^k\}{yk} and the tolerances αk\alpha_kαk​. The difficulty is to obtain primal feasibility and optimality information from dual convergence alone, measured against the asymptotic optimal value rather than the infimum in (P). Every ingredient is extended-real-valued: g0g_0g0​ is −∞-\infty−∞ off the orthant, grg_rgr​ may be identically −∞-\infty−∞, and the asymptotic optimal value may be ±∞\pm\infty±∞. Mathlib does not package this part of convex analysis (partial conjugates, envelopes of extended-real concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem).

Formalization scope

EEE is a bare real vector space (AddCommGroup E, Module ℝ E) with no topology, as in the paper. The functions fif_ifi​ are total functions E→RE \to \mathbb RE→R assumed convex on XXX; only their values on XXX enter. Constraint indices are Fin m (0-based) and f0f_0f0​ is a separate argument. Multipliers live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). The standing assumption of §3 (XXX nonempty convex, all fif_ifi​ convex) is a hypothesis of every theorem.

Explicit choices:

  • grg_rgr​, g0g_0g0​, the dual value, the asymptotic optimal value and every lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup are computed in EReal, so ±∞\pm\infty±∞ are represented and no infimum is replaced by a junk real value.
  • r>0r > 0r>0 is an explicit hypothesis wherever LrL_rLr​ is used; L0L_0L0​ is a separate definition.
  • (4.7) is written Lr(xk,yk)≤gr(yk)+αkL_r(x^k, y^k) \le g_r(y^k) + \alpha_kLr​(xk,yk)≤gr​(yk)+αk​ in EReal, equivalent to the printed difference; only αk→0\alpha_k \to 0αk​→0 is assumed.
  • Concavity or convexity of extended-real functions is stated through convex hypographs and epigraphs; "max" in (3.5) is attainment of the greatest value.
  • Gradients are taken of the real coercion of grg_rgr​, and only under hypotheses that make grg_rgr​ finite.
  • Dual optimal solutions do not exist when gr≡−∞g_r \equiv -\inftygr​≡−∞ (the paper's convention, p. 361).
  • Lemmas 4.2, 4.3 and (4.9)–(4.11) are stated for one point rather than along a sequence; the paper's statements are their instances.
  • Misprints: "concave in y∈Yy \in Yy∈Y" (Theorem 3.1) reads Rm\mathbb R^mRm; the lost minus sign in Lemma 4.2 is restored.

The goal must not be replaced by "f0(xk)→inf⁡(P)f_0(x^k) \to \inf\text{(P)}f0​(xk)→inf(P) and lim sup⁡fi(xk)≤0\limsup f_i(x^k) \le 0limsupfi​(xk)≤0": that is the special case of normal problems with feasible solutions. Nor may it assume a Slater point, a Kuhn–Tucker vector, or feasibility of (P), each of which makes it a special case.

A complete development needs extended-real convex analysis on Rm\mathbb R^mRm (partial conjugates, Moreau envelopes of concave functions, the asymptotic duality theorem), which is reusable beyond this mission. Contributions proving any milestone, or general lemmas on Moreau envelopes of extended-real concave functions, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, A dual approach to solving nonlinear programming problems by unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 5 (1973) 354–373. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01580138
  • M. R. Hestenes, Multiplier and gradient methods, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 4 (1969) 303–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00927673
  • M. J. D. Powell, A method for nonlinear constraints in minimization problems, in R. Fletcher (ed.), Optimization, Academic Press, 1969, 283–298.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, The multiplier method of Hestenes and Powell applied to convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 12 (1973) 555–562. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934777
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1 (1976) 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multiplier Methods, Academic Press, 1982.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions 1: A Convex Program Is Stably Set If and Only If Its Infimum Equals the Attained Maximum of the Dual, inf (P) = max (P*)Research Paper

Motivation

In convex optimization, a dual problem supplies a bound on what a primal minimization problem can achieve. The bound can be useful even when no minimizer is known, but an equality of the primal and dual values says more: it certifies that the bound is exact. In applications, one also wants a dual variable that actually attains the bound, since that variable can act as a multiplier or a sensitivity certificate. Rockafellar's 1967 paper asks when such an attained equality follows from the behavior of the primal value under small changes to the problem Rockafellar 1967.

The paper works with locally convex spaces paired with their continuous duals, rather than limiting the question to finite-dimensional vectors or normed spaces. In this setting, ordinary finite-dimensional constraint qualifications need not describe the relevant behavior. Theorem 3 gives a criterion in terms of the perturbation function itself. It also states the corresponding criterion with the primal and dual roles reversed Rockafellar 1967, §5.

Setting

Let EEE and E′E'E′ be real locally convex Hausdorff spaces in topological duality, with pairing ⟨x,x′⟩E\langle x,x'\rangle_E⟨x,x′⟩E​. Let FFF and F′F'F′ be another such pair. Each pairing represents every continuous linear functional on either member uniquely by a point of the other member. Let A:E→FA:E\to FA:E→F be continuous linear, and let its continuous adjoint A∗:F′→E′A^*:F'\to E'A∗:F′→E′ satisfy ⟨Ax,y′⟩F=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E\langle Ax,y'\rangle_F=\langle x,A^*y'\rangle_E⟨Ax,y′⟩F​=⟨x,A∗y′⟩E​.

The primal data are a lower semicontinuous proper convex function f:E→[−∞,+∞]f:E\to[-\infty,+\infty]f:E→[−∞,+∞] and an upper semicontinuous proper concave function g:F→[−∞,+∞]g:F\to[-\infty,+\infty]g:F→[−∞,+∞]. Here proper means that fff never takes −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere, while ggg never takes +∞+\infty+∞ and is finite somewhere. Convexity means convexity of the real epigraph, and concavity means convexity of −g-g−g. Their conjugates are f∗(x′)=sup⁡x(⟨x,x′⟩E−f(x))f^*(x')=\sup_x(\langle x,x'\rangle_E-f(x))f∗(x′)=supx​(⟨x,x′⟩E​−f(x)) and g∗(y′)=inf⁡y(⟨y,y′⟩F−g(y))g^*(y')=\inf_y(\langle y,y'\rangle_F-g(y))g∗(y′)=infy​(⟨y,y′⟩F​−g(y)) Rockafellar 1967, §2.

The primal problem (P)(P)(P) minimizes f(x)−g(Ax)f(x)-g(Ax)f(x)−g(Ax) over EEE. Its dual (P∗)(P^*)(P∗) maximizes g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′)g^*(y')-f^*(A^*y')g∗(y′)−f∗(A∗y′) over F′F'F′. A translation z∈Fz\in Fz∈F changes the primal objective to f(x)−g(Ax−z)f(x)-g(Ax-z)f(x)−g(Ax−z), giving

h(z)=inf⁡x∈E{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf⁡(P).h(z)=\inf_{x\in E}\{f(x)-g(Ax-z)\},\qquad h(0)=\inf(P).h(z)=x∈Einf​{f(x)−g(Ax−z)},h(0)=inf(P).

The primal problem is stably set when it is consistent, meaning h(0)<+∞h(0)<+\inftyh(0)<+∞, and when directional rates of change of hhh at zero cannot be arbitrarily negative in every neighborhood of zero. The instability test is made only when h(0)h(0)h(0) is finite. Consequently h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞ counts as stable, as the paper explicitly observes Rockafellar 1967, §4–5. The dual stability condition is the same definition applied to the dual's minimization form (P′)(P')(P′), with perturbations in E′E'E′.

Formalization targets

The goal is both directions of Theorem 3, including the dual statement:

(P) stably set⟺inf⁡(P)=max⁡(P∗),(P)\text{ stably set}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \inf(P)=\max(P^*),(P) stably set⟺inf(P)=max(P∗), min⁡(P)=sup⁡(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.\min(P)=\sup(P^*)\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad (P^*)\text{ stably set}.min(P)=sup(P∗)⟺(P∗) stably set.

The symbols max⁡\maxmax and min⁡\minmin assert that the stated value is attained. A statement equating only an infimum and a supremum would omit part of the theorem. The mission's milestones are the convexity of hhh (Lemma 2), the equivalence between stability and a nonempty subdifferential ∂h(0)\partial h(0)∂h(0), the criterion linking a subgradient to inequality (5.1), and weak duality (Lemma 1). Each is a claim stated in the paper's proof or as a numbered lemma Rockafellar 1967, pp. 174, 178–179.

Significance

The theorem turns a local property of the optimal-value function into an exact, attained duality statement. A dual optimum has operational meaning: its point y′∈F′y'\in F'y′∈F′ is a continuous linear response to perturbations z∈Fz\in Fz∈F, expressed through ⟨z,y′⟩F\langle z,y'\rangle_F⟨z,y′⟩F​. The converse says that attained exact duality already forces the same stability property. The dual half adds a symmetric criterion for attainment of the primal minimum Rockafellar 1967, Theorem 3.

The 1967 result is proved in the cited paper; this mission asks for its Lean formalization. A complete development would give reusable definitions for paired locally convex spaces, extended-real conjugates, epigraph convexity, and perturbation-based stability. The milestone statements expose the intermediate mathematical claims separately, so later formalizations can use the parts they need without importing the entire theorem.

Difficulty

Weak duality by itself gives only an inequality. It does not supply a dual point achieving the primal infimum, and equality of two extended-real lattice values does not establish attainment. The central issue is that a perturbation function can have a finite value at zero yet fall at arbitrarily steep rates in nearby directions; then no continuous linear support at zero need exist. Infinite primal values bring two additional cases: inconsistency when h(0)=+∞h(0)=+\inftyh(0)=+∞, and the paper's stable case when h(0)=−∞h(0)=-\inftyh(0)=−∞. The dual half requires the topology on E′E'E′ because the translated dual problem is perturbed there Rockafellar 1967, §§4–5.

Formalization scope

The Lean representation uses EReal for all objective and conjugate values; its complete lattice gives the paper's ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values for unbounded or empty extrema. Spaces are arbitrary locally convex Hausdorff real topological vector spaces equipped with a pairing that identifies each space with the continuous linear dual of the other. The adjoint is continuous linear data constrained by the pairing identity. Properness rules out endpoint arithmetic of the form +∞−(+∞)+\infty-(+\infty)+∞−(+∞) in the primal and dual objectives. The conjugates are defined from fff and ggg; their regularity is not assumed separately.

Stability is encoded using the positive one-sided lower limit of directional difference quotients, which equals the paper's limit for convex hhh. It requires consistency and excludes arbitrarily negative rates in every neighborhood. It is not defined by ∂h(0)≠∅\partial h(0)\ne\varnothing∂h(0)=∅: that equivalence is an independent milestone. Attained extrema are represented by greatest and least elements of the ranges of the objective functions, rather than by equality of lattice values alone. The formalization includes both halves of Theorem 3 and all four listed milestones. Contributions toward general convex analysis on paired spaces and toward the extended-real endpoint cases are useful beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar, Duality and Stability in Extremum Problems Involving Convex Functions, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 21 (1967), 167–187. DOI: 10.2140/pjm.1967.21.167.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment I: With Linear Order Costs, a World-Dependent Basestock Policy Is Optimal over the Infinite HorizonResearch Paper

Motivation

An inventory controller must decide how much to order while demand changes with an observed external condition. A single demand rate misses that dependence: the same inventory position can justify different orders when the condition changes. Song and Zipkin's 1993 study asks whether a simple policy remains optimal when the condition follows a continuous-time Markov chain and orders arrive after a random lead time. The answer for linear ordering costs is a world-dependent basestock policy: each world state has one target inventory position, and an order raises the current position to that target when it lies below it.

The policy claim concerns an infinite horizon. It is stronger than showing that a particular collection of target levels performs well or that such a policy minimizes a one-step cost. Theorem 2 of Song and Zipkin identifies the targets through a limiting value function and establishes optimality for the full discounted problem. This mission formalizes that theorem and the finite-stage results the authors use to state its limit precisely.

Setting

The world state iii belongs to a nonempty countable set III. The world evolves according to a conservative continuous-time Markov generator Q=(qij)Q=(q_{ij})Q=(qij​), with exit rate qi=−qiiq_i=-q_{ii}qi​=−qii​. When the world is in state iii, customers demand individual units at rate λi≥0\lambda_i\ge0λi​≥0. The exit rates and demand rates are bounded above. Inventory is fully backlogged: a negative inventory level records unmet demand. The controller observes the world state and the inventory position x∈Zx\in\mathbb Zx∈Z, which includes outstanding orders, and chooses an order-up-to position y≥xy\ge xy≥x.

An order has actual unit cost cˉ≥0\bar c\ge0cˉ≥0 and may have fixed cost Kˉ≥0\bar K\ge0Kˉ≥0. This mission takes the linear-cost case, so the discounted fixed cost is K=0K=0K=0. The lead time LLL is a finite nonnegative random time, independent of the world and demand process. Its Laplace transform discounts the ordering costs to c=cˉ E[e−αL]c=\bar c\,E[e^{-\alpha L}]c=cˉE[e−αL], where α>0\alpha>0α>0 is the discount rate. Holding one unit costs h>0h>0h>0 per unit time; backlogging one unit costs p>0p>0p>0.

Write DLiD_L^iDLi​ for the number of demands during the lead time conditional on initial world state iii. The cost rate of an inventory level zzz is C^(z)=−pz\widehat C(z)=-pzC(z)=−pz for z<0z<0z<0 and hzhzhz otherwise. The lead-time cost and myopic cost are

C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi)],G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y),C(i,y)=E[e^{-\alpha L}\widehat C(y-D_L^i)],\qquad G^+(i,y)=(1-\gamma)cy+\beta C(i,y),C(i,y)=E[e−αLC(y−DLi​)],G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y),

where μ>0\mu>0μ>0 is a uniformization rate at least sup⁡iqi+sup⁡iλi\sup_iq_i+\sup_i\lambda_isupi​qi​+supi​λi​, β=(μ+α)−1\beta=(\mu+\alpha)^{-1}β=(μ+α)−1, and γ=βμ\gamma=\beta\muγ=βμ. The paper's Assumption 1, αcˉ<p\alpha\bar c<pαcˉ<p, applies to the later results. It ensures the myopic cost has finite nonnegative minimizers. The smallest such minimizer in world state iii is y+(i)y^+(i)y+(i), and ymin⁡+=min⁡iy+(i)y^+_{\min}=\min_i y^+(i)ymin+​=mini​y+(i).

With zero fixed cost and zero terminal cost, the nnn-stage transformed cost Wn(i,x)W_n(i,x)Wn​(i,x) minimizes the auxiliary cost Gn(i,y)G_n(i,y)Gn​(i,y) over y≥xy\ge xy≥x. Each GnG_nGn​ combines the myopic cost with the expected discounted continuation after a demand, a world-state jump, or a self-loop. Let W∞W_\inftyW∞​ and G∞G_\inftyG∞​ denote their pointwise limits. A basestock policy π(y)\pi(y)π(y) orders to max⁡{x,y(i)}\max\{x,y(i)\}max{x,y(i)} in state (i,x)(i,x)(i,x); it never cancels an outstanding order.

Formalization targets

The main target is the finite, smallest global minimizer y∗(i)y^*(i)y∗(i) of G∞(i,⋅)G_\infty(i,\cdot)G∞​(i,⋅) for each world state, with the inequalities of Theorem 2(c):

0≤ymin⁡+≤y∗(i)≤y∞∗(i)≤y+(i),G∞(i,y∞∗(i))=min⁡z∈ZG∞(i,z).0\le y^+_{\min}\le y^*(i)\le y^*_\infty(i)\le y^+(i), \qquad G_\infty(i,y^*_\infty(i))=\min_{z\in\mathbb Z}G_\infty(i,z).0≤ymin+​≤y∗(i)≤y∞∗​(i)≤y+(i),G∞​(i,y∞∗​(i))=z∈Zmin​G∞​(i,z).

Here y∞∗(i)y^*_\infty(i)y∞∗​(i) is the limit of the smallest finite-stage minimizers yn∗(i)y^*_n(i)yn∗​(i). Theorem 2(e) then asserts that π(y∗)\pi(y^*)π(y∗) has minimum infinite-horizon expected discounted cost from every state among all feasible policies. The milestone list states Lemmas 1, 2 and 4, Corollaries 1 and 2, all parts of Theorem 1 as identified by the paper's internal references, and the limit and optimality-equation clauses of Theorem 2. Together they fix the finite-stage and limiting objects used by the goal.

Significance

The theorem reduces a decision at every integer inventory position to one integer target for each observed world state. It gives an exact policy structure for a model with a changing demand rate and random lead time, rather than an approximation derived from a constant-demand model. The limiting inequalities also locate an optimal target relative to the myopic target and the finite-stage targets, giving a mathematically specified range for policy computation. These claims are the linear-cost part of Song and Zipkin's analysis; the paper proves the result but supplies no Lean proof.

Formalization will leave reusable definitions for countable-state uniformization with a demand counter, integer convexity of inventory cost functions, and discounted costs of history-dependent policies. The mission's theorem statements compile as open goals. The remaining work is to verify the analytic properties of the lead-time demand law, the finite-stage inequalities, convergence, and the infinite-horizon policy comparison. The fixed-order-cost and monotone-world-state results of the paper are separate missions.

Difficulty

The world can have countably many states, so a continuation value includes a series over possible world jumps. The stage cost grows with inventory position, so a bounded-cost finite-state dynamic-programming theorem does not directly cover the model. The minimization is over an unbounded set of integers, and the minimizers themselves change with the stage number. Convexity of a one-stage cost alone does not establish that the limiting policy beats policies that use the entire observation history. These are the specific gaps the paper's bound, ordered-difference, and limit results address.

Formalization scope

World states are a nonempty countable Lean type, inventory positions and order-up-to levels are integers, and costs are real until policy evaluation. The lead-time law is a probability measure on finite nonnegative real times, independent of world and demand. The demand-count law is defined by exact Poisson uniformization at rate μ\muμ, with demand, world-jump, and self-loop branches. The infinite-horizon policy cost uses extended nonnegative reals and a supremum of finite-horizon costs, so it can express an infinite expected cost without a default real value. Policies may depend on all past observed states; the goal compares its basestock policy against every feasible deterministic policy in this class. Randomized policies are omitted because they cannot improve expected nonnegative costs on this countable state space.

Assumption 1 is attached only to the results that use it. The linear-cost recursion has K=0K=0K=0 and W0=0W_0=0W0​=0. Integer convexity means nondecreasing forward differences. Smallest minimizers and the minimum across world states are asserted to exist; neither is encoded by an integer infimum that returns a default on an empty or unbounded set. The goal requires an actual optimal policy cost comparison from every state, so solving the limiting optimality equation only within basestock policies cannot close it. Contributions to the lead-time mixture, integer convexity, boundedness of the real series and infima, and unrestricted policy comparison all fit this scope.

Selected references

  • Jing-Sheng Song and Paul Zipkin, Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment, Operations Research 41(2):351–370, 1993. DOI 10.1287/opre.41.2.351.
12 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisFunctional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions: Strong Approximation by a Function with Lipschitzian Inverse Yields a Unique Lipschitzian Implicit FunctionResearch Paper

Why a nonsmooth implicit-function theorem

The classical implicit-function theorem solves an equation F(x,y)=0F(x, y) = 0F(x,y)=0 for xxx as a function of a parameter yyy near a known solution (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​), provided FFF is (strongly) Fréchet differentiable in xxx with an invertible partial derivative. Much of optimization does not meet that hypothesis. Optimality conditions of constrained problems, complementarity problems and variational inequalities are routinely rewritten as equations involving the projection onto a convex set, the componentwise min⁡\minmin, or the normal map of a polyhedron. These maps are Lipschitzian and piecewise smooth, but not differentiable. Sensitivity analysis asks whether the solution of such a system moves Lipschitz-continuously with the problem data, and the classical theorem cannot answer it.

Stephen M. Robinson, An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(2), 1991, pp. 292–309, gives a theorem with the same shape as the classical one, in which differentiability is replaced by strong approximation by a function whose inverse is Lipschitzian. The paper's §4 applies it to parametric variational inequalities over polyhedral sets through the normal map.

Timeline. Robinson's Strongly regular generalized equations (Math. Oper. Res. 5, 1980) proved an implicit-function theorem for generalized equations under a linearization hypothesis called strong regularity. The 1991 paper reformulates that idea for single-valued nonsmooth equations: the approximating function fff need not be linear. Lemma 3.1 extends the Banach perturbation lemma for linear operators (Kantorovich–Akilov, Functional Analysis, Th. 4(2.V)) to Lipschitzian functions; after acceptance, A. Ioffe pointed the author to closely related results of Dmitruk, Milyutin and Osmolovskii (Lyusternik's theorem and the theory of extrema, Russian Math. Surveys, 1980, Theorems 1.2, 1.3), credited in the paper's footnote.

Setting

Let XXX, YYY, ZZZ be real normed linear spaces, with XXX complete. Fix x0∈Xx_0 \in Xx0​∈X, y0∈Yy_0 \in Yy0​∈Y, a neighborhood Ξ\XiΞ of x0x_0x0​ and a neighborhood HHH of y0y_0y0​. Let FFF map Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H to ZZZ, with F(x0,y0)=0F(x_0, y_0) = 0F(x0​,y0​)=0, and let fff map Ξ\XiΞ to ZZZ, with f(x0)=0f(x_0) = 0f(x0​)=0. B(x,ρ)B(x, \rho)B(x,ρ) denotes the closed ball of radius ρ\rhoρ about xxx.

Expansion modulus. For a map fff between metric spaces and a set SSS,

δ(f,S)=inf⁡{∥f(x1)−f(x2)∥∥x1−x2∥:x1≠x2, x1,x2∈S}.\delta(f, S) = \inf\left\{ \frac{\|f(x_1) - f(x_2)\|}{\|x_1 - x_2\|} : x_1 \ne x_2,\ x_1, x_2 \in S \right\}.δ(f,S)=inf{∥x1​−x2​∥∥f(x1​)−f(x2​)∥​:x1​=x2​, x1​,x2​∈S}.

If δ(f,S)>0\delta(f,S) > 0δ(f,S)>0, then fff is one-to-one on SSS and its inverse is Lipschitzian with modulus δ(f,S)−1\delta(f,S)^{-1}δ(f,S)−1. In Lean the mission works with lower bounds: ExpansionAtLeast f S d says d ∥x1−x2∥≤∥f(x1)−f(x2)∥d\,\|x_1 - x_2\| \le \|f(x_1) - f(x_2)\|d∥x1​−x2​∥≤∥f(x1​)−f(x2​)∥ on SSS, i.e. d≤δ(f,S)d \le \delta(f,S)d≤δ(f,S).

Strong approximation (Definition 2.4). fff strongly approximates FFF in xxx at (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​), written f≈xFf \approx_x Ff≈x​F (Lean: StronglyApproxInX f F x₀ y₀), if for each ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there are neighborhoods UUU of x0x_0x0​ and VVV of y0y_0y0​ with

∥[F(x,y)−f(x)]−[F(x′,y)−f(x′)]∥≤ε∥x−x′∥(x,x′∈U, y∈V).\big\|[F(x, y) - f(x)] - [F(x', y) - f(x')]\big\| \le \varepsilon \|x - x'\| \qquad (x, x' \in U,\ y \in V).​[F(x,y)−f(x)]−[F(x′,y)−f(x′)]​≤ε∥x−x′∥(x,x′∈U, y∈V).

When fff is the partial derivative map x↦Fx(x0,y0)(x−x0)x \mapsto F_x(x_0,y_0)(x - x_0)x↦Fx​(x0​,y0​)(x−x0​) this is strong partial Fréchet differentiability; in general fff may be piecewise linear or any map with a Lipschitzian inverse.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 299)

Assume (a) f≈xFf \approx_x Ff≈x​F at (x0,y0)(x_0, y_0)(x0​,y0​); (b) for each x∈Ξx \in \Xix∈Ξ, F(x,⋅)F(x, \cdot)F(x,⋅) is Lipschitzian on HHH with modulus φ\varphiφ; (c) f(Ξ)f(\Xi)f(Ξ) is a neighborhood of 000 in ZZZ; (d) δ(f,Ξ)=:d0>0\delta(f, \Xi) =: d_0 > 0δ(f,Ξ)=:d0​>0. Then for each λ>d0−1φ\lambda > d_0^{-1}\varphiλ>d0−1​φ there are neighborhoods U⊆ΞU \subseteq \XiU⊆Ξ of x0x_0x0​, V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H of y0y_0y0​ and a function x:V→Ux : V \to Ux:V→U with

x(y0)=x0,∥x(y1)−x(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥ (y1,y2∈V),{ξ∈U:F(ξ,y)=0}={x(y)} (y∈V).x(y_0) = x_0, \qquad \|x(y_1) - x(y_2)\| \le \lambda \|y_1 - y_2\| \ (y_1, y_2 \in V), \qquad \{\xi \in U : F(\xi, y) = 0\} = \{x(y)\} \ (y \in V).x(y0​)=x0​,∥x(y1​)−x(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ (y1​,y2​∈V),{ξ∈U:F(ξ,y)=0}={x(y)} (y∈V).

Every λ\lambdaλ strictly above φ/d0\varphi/d_0φ/d0​ is claimed; λ=φ/d0\lambda = \varphi/d_0λ=φ/d0​ is not.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.1 (p. 298), the Lipschitz perturbation lemma: if fff maps Ω\OmegaΩ onto a ball B(y0,α)B(y_0, \alpha)B(y0​,α), hhh is Lipschitzian with modulus η<δ:=δ(f,Ω)\eta < \delta := \delta(f, \Omega)η<δ:=δ(f,Ω), Ω⊇B(x0,δ−1α)\Omega \supseteq B(x_0, \delta^{-1}\alpha)Ω⊇B(x0​,δ−1α) and θ:=(1−ηδ−1)α−∥h(x0)∥≥0\theta := (1 - \eta\delta^{-1})\alpha - \|h(x_0)\| \ge 0θ:=(1−ηδ−1)α−∥h(x0​)∥≥0, then
(f+h)(B(x0,δ−1α))⊇B(y0,θ),δ(f+h,Ω)≥δ−η>0.(f + h)\big(B(x_0, \delta^{-1}\alpha)\big) \supseteq B(y_0, \theta), \qquad \delta(f + h, \Omega) \ge \delta - \eta > 0.(f+h)(B(x0​,δ−1α))⊇B(y0​,θ),δ(f+h,Ω)≥δ−η>0.
  1. (3.1)–(3.2) in the proof of Theorem 3.2 (p. 300): for every ε∈(0,d0)\varepsilon \in (0, d_0)ε∈(0,d0​) there are α,κ>0\alpha, \kappa > 0α,κ>0 and a neighborhood V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H of y0y_0y0​ with Ω=B(x0,d0−1α)⊆Ξ\Omega = B(x_0, d_0^{-1}\alpha) \subseteq \XiΩ=B(x0​,d0−1​α)⊆Ξ such that for each y∈Vy \in Vy∈V
δ(F(⋅,y),Ω)≥d0−ε,F(⋅,y)(Ω)⊇B(0,θ(y))⊇B(0,κ),\delta(F(\cdot, y), \Omega) \ge d_0 - \varepsilon, \qquad F(\cdot, y)(\Omega) \supseteq B(0, \theta(y)) \supseteq B(0, \kappa),δ(F(⋅,y),Ω)≥d0​−ε,F(⋅,y)(Ω)⊇B(0,θ(y))⊇B(0,κ),

where θ(y)=(1−εd0−1)α−∥F(x0,y)∥\theta(y) = (1 - \varepsilon d_0^{-1})\alpha - \|F(x_0, y)\|θ(y)=(1−εd0−1​)α−∥F(x0​,y)∥.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 yields existence, local uniqueness and Lipschitz dependence of solutions of parametrized nonsmooth equations, with an explicit Lipschitz modulus arbitrarily close to φ/d0\varphi/d_0φ/d0​. In the paper it underlies Theorem 3.3 and Corollary 3.4 (approximation and B-differentiation of the implicit function) and the sensitivity results of §4 for parametric variational inequalities over polyhedral convex sets. The same template, an equation approximated by a map with Lipschitzian inverse, is the basis of later strong-regularity and semismooth-Newton analyses in nonlinear programming and complementarity.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; it has not been machine-checked. The platform has the smooth implicit-function theorem (FamousTheorems.implicit_function_theorem, Rudin.ch09_implicit_function) and Mathlib has the contraction mapping principle, but there is no Lipschitz-inverse perturbation result and no notion of strong approximation. The mission produces both, together with the formal Theorem 3.2 that a follow-on mission (Theorem 3.3, Corollary 3.4, §4) would reference.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, differentiate and invert, is unavailable: fff need not have a derivative anywhere near x0x_0x0​, so neither Mathlib's implicit-function theorem nor its inverse-function theorem applies. The difficulty is to obtain surjectivity of F(⋅,y)F(\cdot, y)F(⋅,y) onto a ball uniformly in yyy from information about fff alone. Injectivity transfers directly from fff through the small Lipschitz modulus of F(⋅,y)−fF(\cdot, y) - fF(⋅,y)−f; surjectivity does not, because fff carries no information about F(⋅,y)F(\cdot, y)F(⋅,y) beyond the small Lipschitz modulus of the difference, and the domain ball, the image ball and the parameter neighborhood must be chosen once for all yyy. Completeness of XXX is essential (the paper stresses this on p. 306) and is not available for YYY and ZZZ.

Formalization scope

All statements live in namespace RobinsonNSIFT.Implicit. Committed conventions:

  • Scalars are real; XXX is a complete normed space ([CompleteSpace X]); YYY, ZZZ are normed spaces without completeness. Lemma 3.1's domain is a complete metric space, not a normed one.
  • δ(f,S)\delta(f, S)δ(f,S) via lower bounds. Every statement takes a real ddd with ExpansionAtLeast f S d in place of "d=δ(f,S)d = \delta(f,S)d=δ(f,S)", universally quantified. This is equivalent to the paper's statements and avoids a real infimum that would be 000 on sets with fewer than two points.
  • Total functions. FFF is a curried total function F : X → Y → Z and f:X→Zf : X \to Zf:X→Z; hypotheses constrain them on Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H only, and the conclusions keep the implicit function inside the domain: U⊆ΞU \subseteq \XiU⊆Ξ, V⊆HV \subseteq HV⊆H, x(V)⊆Ux(V) \subseteq Ux(V)⊆U. This makes explicit what the paper leaves implicit (its FFF is only defined on Ξ×H\Xi \times HΞ×H). Likewise Ω⊆Ξ\Omega \subseteq \XiΩ⊆Ξ, used implicitly in the paper's proof, is a conclusion of milestone 2.
  • Closed balls (Metric.closedBall), radii δ−1α\delta^{-1}\alphaδ−1α written α / δ; neighborhoods are filter members ∈ 𝓝 _, not necessarily open; Lipschitz moduli are ℝ≥0 and Lipschitz conditions are LipschitzOnWith on the stated set.
  • Lemma 3.1 keeps the paper's hypothesis that Ω\OmegaΩ is open, although Theorem 3.2's proof applies it to a closed ball.
  • Milestone 2 states as an existence claim, for every ε∈(0,d0)\varepsilon \in (0, d_0)ε∈(0,d0​), the choices the paper makes at the start of its proof.

A formalization in which hypothesis (a) is the weak approximation of Definition 2.1 (only at y=y0y = y_0y=y0​), in which VVV may shrink to {y0}\{y_0\}{y0​}, λ\lambdaλ is existential, or uniqueness is asserted outside Ξ\XiΞ, would be a different and trivial or false statement; the statements here rule these out.

Needed infrastructure: the contraction mapping principle on a closed subset of a complete space (Mathlib's ContractingWith), Lipschitz estimates on sets, and the two definitions of this mission. Lemma 3.1 is reusable for any Lipschitz-perturbation argument. Proofs of either milestone, or a direct proof of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, An Implicit-Function Theorem for a Class of Nonsmooth Functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(2), 1991, 292–309. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.2.292
  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly Regular Generalized Equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 1980, 43–62. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • A. V. Dmitruk, A. A. Milyutin, N. P. Osmolovskii, Lyusternik's theorem and the theory of extrema, Russian Mathematical Surveys 1980, No. 6, 11–51 (as cited in Robinson 1991, p. 298).
  • L. V. Kantorovich, G. P. Akilov, Functional Analysis, cited in Robinson 1991 as [17].
4 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMechanism DesignOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Incentive Compatibility and the Bargaining Problem I: The Incentive-Feasible Set Is Compact and Convex, and the Generalized Nash Bargaining Solution over It Exists and Is UniqueResearch Paper

Why private information changes bargaining

An arbitrator choosing an outcome for several people can ask them about their preferences, but the answer to that question may affect the outcome. A person who expects to gain from a false report may give one. Roger Myerson's 1979 paper puts this incentive problem inside a bargaining model: the arbitrator may randomize over collective choices, and an allocation is considered feasible only if some mechanism makes truthful reporting an equilibrium. The paper then applies a weighted Nash bargaining criterion to the resulting set of feasible interim payoffs. The mission formalizes the existence and uniqueness result for that criterion, along with the finite Bayesian model on which it depends.

The issue matters whenever an agreement is selected using information known privately to its participants. If the arbitrator evaluates a payoff vector that can arise only when somebody has a reason to lie, that vector cannot serve as a credible bargaining alternative under the model's own behavior assumption. Myerson's feasible set keeps the behavioral constraint visible when the group compares agreements. This mission addresses the paper's Theorems 1 and 3 and the claims between them that establish the relevant sets and their reference point.

The finite Bayesian choice problem

Let III be a nonempty finite set of players. Player iii has a nonempty finite type set AiA_iAi​, and the group has a nonempty finite set CCC of possible choices. A type profile is α∈∏i∈IAi\alpha\in\prod_{i\in I}A_iα∈∏i∈I​Ai​. The utility Ui(c,α)∈RU_i(c,\alpha)\in\mathbb RUi​(c,α)∈R is player iii's payoff when choice ccc occurs and α\alphaα is the true profile. A nonnegative function PPP on type profiles, summing to one, is the common prior. Write Ri(ai)R_i(a_i)Ri​(ai​) for the probability that player iii has type aia_iai​, and Pi(α∣ai)P_i(\alpha\mid a_i)Pi​(α∣ai​) for the posterior probability of α\alphaα conditional on that type. Every Ri(ai)R_i(a_i)Ri​(ai​) is positive, so the conditional probabilities are defined.

A choice mechanism π\piπ asks each player for a response and assigns a probability π(c∣s)\pi(c\mid s)π(c∣s) to each choice ccc at each response profile sss. For the direct mechanisms used here, the response set of player iii is AiA_iAi​: a response is a claimed type. The probabilities are nonnegative and sum to one for each response profile. If a player whose true type is aia_iai​ instead reports bib_ibi​, while the others report truthfully, the player's conditional expected utility is Zi(π,bi∣ai)Z_i(\pi,b_i\mid a_i)Zi​(π,bi​∣ai​). The posterior Pi(α∣ai)P_i(\alpha\mid a_i)Pi​(α∣ai​) weights true profiles; the mechanism sees the profile with only coordinate iii replaced by bib_ibi​; and utility is evaluated at the true profile α\alphaα.

The mechanism is Bayesian incentive-compatible when Zi(π,ai∣ai)≥Zi(π,bi∣ai)Z_i(\pi,a_i\mid a_i)\ge Z_i(\pi,b_i\mid a_i)Zi​(π,ai​∣ai​)≥Zi​(π,bi​∣ai​) for every player and pair of types. Its interim payoff vector V(π)V(\pi)V(π) has one coordinate Vi,ai(π)=Zi(π,ai∣ai)V_{i,a_i}(\pi)=Z_i(\pi,a_i\mid a_i)Vi,ai​​(π)=Zi​(π,ai​∣ai​) for every player-type pair. The set FFF contains the vectors attained by all direct choice mechanisms; F∗F^*F∗ contains those attained by Bayesian incentive-compatible direct choice mechanisms. Theorem 1 says F∗F^*F∗ is nonempty, convex, compact, and contained in FFF. The nonemptiness claim includes the mechanism that selects each choice with probability 1/∣C∣1/|C|1/∣C∣, independent of all reports.

Formalization targets

Fix a conflict outcome c∗∈Cc^*\in Cc∗∈C: the choice that occurs if bargaining fails. Its conflict payoff vector ttt gives each player type the conditional expected utility from that fixed choice. A constant mechanism selects c∗c^*c∗ regardless of reports. It is incentive-compatible and generates ttt, so t∈F∗t\in F^*t∈F∗. The individually rational incentive-feasible set is

F+∗={x∈F∗:xi,ai≥ti,ai for all i,ai}.F^*_+=\{x\in F^*: x_{i,a_i}\ge t_{i,a_i}\text{ for all }i,a_i\}.F+∗​={x∈F∗:xi,ai​​≥ti,ai​​ for all i,ai​}.

For x∈F+∗x\in F^*_+x∈F+∗​, the generalized Nash product of equation (18) is

N(x)=∏i∈I∏ai∈Ai(xi,ai−ti,ai)Ri(ai).N(x)=\prod_{i\in I}\prod_{a_i\in A_i} (x_{i,a_i}-t_{i,a_i})^{R_i(a_i)}.N(x)=i∈I∏​ai​∈Ai​∏​(xi,ai​​−ti,ai​​)Ri​(ai​).

A bargaining solution is a vector in F+∗F^*_+F+∗​ that maximizes NNN over that set. Myerson's Theorem 3, the goal of this mission, says that if the constant conflict mechanism is not incentive-efficient—that is, an incentive-compatible mechanism strictly improves every player-type payoff over it—then exactly one such vector exists:

¬Efficient⁡(πc∗)⟹∃!x∈F+∗  ∀y∈F+∗,  N(y)≤N(x).\neg\operatorname{Efficient}(\pi_{c^*}) \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \exists!x\in F^*_+\;\forall y\in F^*_+,\;N(y)\le N(x).¬Efficient(πc∗​)⟹∃!x∈F+∗​∀y∈F+∗​,N(y)≤N(x).

The milestones follow the paper's claims: the uniform mechanism is incentive-compatible; F∗F^*F∗ has the four properties in Theorem 1; the conflict vector belongs to F∗F^*F∗; every Nash-product maximizer strictly improves each conflict payoff when such improvement is feasible; and every implementing mechanism is incentive-efficient. The final claim concerns a mechanism that realizes the maximizing vector. It does not assert uniqueness of that mechanism.

What the result provides

Theorem 1 supplies a feasible set that respects truthful reporting. Theorem 3 selects a unique interim payoff vector from that set after a conflict outcome is specified. It thereby gives a well-defined allocation criterion for the paper's finite Bayesian collective choice problems. Myerson also observes that several mechanisms may implement the same solution. The allocation, rather than a unique mechanism, is the object selected by the theorem.

The result was proved in the 1979 paper. The work here is a machine-checked statement and, for solvers, a proof of that known result and its supporting claims in Lean. The mission's statements are open proof targets; the source paper's proof is not claimed to have been formalized already. A related platform item on Nash's two-player axiomatic characterization concerns a solution function on compact convex subsets of R2\mathbb R^2R2. It is a distinct result and supplies neither this paper's Bayesian model nor Theorem 3.

The mathematical obstacle

The set of all real-valued functions on choices and reports is much larger than the set of mechanisms: probabilities must be nonnegative and sum to one at every report profile. Bayesian incentive compatibility adds inequalities involving the true and reported type in different positions. Theorem 1 requires these constraints to give the compact, convex set of attainable interim payoffs, rather than merely a formal collection of payoff functions.

The Nash product also has a boundary: an individually rational vector may match the conflict payoff in one coordinate, making its product zero. Theorem 3's hypothesis has to rule out a zero maximum before uniqueness of an interior maximum can be concluded. The weights Ri(ai)R_i(a_i)Ri​(ai​) matter in that uniqueness statement, and the result ranges over all player-type coordinates, not only one aggregate payoff per player. Restricting the maximization to an arbitrary small subset, fixing two players, or assuming a positive maximum would change the theorem.

Formalization scope

Lean represents players, each type set, and choices as finite nonempty types. Type profiles are dependent functions ∏iAi\prod_i A_i∏i​Ai​; interim vectors are real functions on the disjoint union ∑iAi\sum_i A_i∑i​Ai​, with the product topology. A mechanism is a real function π:C→(∏iAi)→R\pi:C\to(\prod_i A_i)\to\mathbb Rπ:C→(∏i​Ai​)→R subject to explicit nonnegativity and sum-to-one constraints. Both FFF and F∗F^*F∗ quantify only over functions satisfying those constraints. Conditional beliefs use the common prior in equations (3)–(4), and positive marginal probabilities make every denominator meaningful without requiring positive probability for each full profile. The positivity of every Ri(ai)R_i(a_i)Ri​(ai​) is an assumption the paper makes implicitly by dividing by it in (3); it is a field of the problem structure, not a hypothesis of the theorems. The subjective reading of PiP_iPi​ and RiR_iRi​ that the paper permits on p. 63, the response-plan equilibria of Section 3, and the numerical example of Section 6 are outside this mission.

Strict dominance means a strict gain for every player type. The constant mechanism, conflict vector, and individually rational set are defined from the problem data. The conflict vector is defined by equation (16), while its equality with the constant mechanism's payoff is a theorem item. The product uses real powers with the paper's marginal weights and is compared only on F+∗F^*_+F+∗​, where each base is nonnegative. A solution is a maximizer property; it is not chosen in advance or supplied as a theorem hypothesis. These choices exclude vacuous encodings of incentive efficiency, unrestricted mechanisms, and a maximization domain that already contains only a nominated winner.

A complete proof development needs finite sums and products, continuous and convex maps on finite-dimensional real spaces, compactness of the constrained mechanism set, and facts about positive weighted real powers or logarithms on the strictly positive region. The model definitions can be reused for the paper's separate revelation-principle mission; this mission also welcomes proofs of the explicit claims about the uniform mechanism, the conflict mechanism, and product maximizers.

Selected references

  • Roger B. Myerson, Incentive Compatibility and the Bargaining Problem, Econometrica 47(1), 61–73, 1979. DOI: 10.2307/1912346.
  • John F. Nash, The Bargaining Problem, Econometrica 18(2), 155–162, 1950. DOI: 10.2307/1907266.
  • John C. Harsanyi and Reinhard Selten, A Generalized Nash Solution for Two-Person Bargaining Games with Incomplete Information, Management Science 18(5), P80–P106, 1972. DOI: 10.1287/mnsc.18.5.80.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities II: Neither Unlimited Returns at Full Credit nor a No-Returns Policy Coordinates the ChannelResearch Paper

Why return terms matter

Manufacturers of perishable goods must decide how much inventory risk to leave with retailers. A retailer who pays for every ordered unit may order less than is best for the manufacturer and retailer together; a generous return policy changes that incentive. Pasternack studies this question in a single-period setting, with a fixed selling price, uncertain demand and goodwill costs when customers cannot be served. The article identifies two familiar endpoint policies that fail: no returns, and unlimited returns reimbursed at the full wholesale price. It then investigates partial credit as a way to align the order decisions. Pasternack (1985)

The target here is the article's paired Theorems 1 and 2. They concern one retailer and one manufacturer, and their conclusion is about the order quantity the retailer chooses. The model does not ask the retailer to choose the selling price, nor does it compare realized profits for one particular demand outcome. The value of the result lies in ruling out two whole classes of pricing and return terms before considering how to divide the gains from a coordinated channel. Pasternack (1985), pp. 169–171

The single-period setting

A manufacturer produces at unit cost ccc and charges the retailer a wholesale price c1c_1c1​. The retailer orders Q≥0Q\ge0Q≥0 units before observing demand XXX, then sells at a fixed retail price ppp. Unsold units have salvage value c3c_3c3​. A return policy gives the retailer a credit c2c_2c2​ for a fraction R∈[0,1]R\in[0,1]R∈[0,1] of the order: R=0R=0R=0 permits no returns and R=1R=1R=1 permits returns of every leftover unit. The retailer incurs goodwill cost ggg for each unmet unit of demand; the manufacturer bears the additional cost g1g_1g1​, and g2=g+g1g_2=g+g_1g2​=g+g1​ is the total goodwill cost. The paper assumes c3<c<c1<pc_3<c<c_1<pc3​<c<c1​<p and c3<c2≤c1<pc_3<c_2\le c_1<pc3​<c2​≤c1​<p. Pasternack (1985), pp. 169–170, (1)–(2)

Demand is described by a density fff on the nonnegative reals and distribution function F(Q)=∫0Qf(x) dxF(Q)=\int_0^Q f(x)\,dxF(Q)=∫0Q​f(x)dx. From the same order and demand outcome, the paper computes three expected profits: EPT(Q)EP_T(Q)EPT​(Q) for an integrated company store, EPR(Q)EP_R(Q)EPR​(Q) for the independent retailer, and EPM(Q)EP_M(Q)EPM​(Q) for the manufacturer. Their definitions are equations (3), (6) and (8). An optimal order maximizes the relevant expected profit over nonnegative QQQ. The paper calls the channel coordinated when the retailer chooses a system-optimal order, as if the manufacturer operated the store directly. The formal model compares the sets of all such optimal orders, so it also handles a distribution whose CDF is flat over an interval. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170–171, (3), (6), (8)–(10)

Formalization targets

The integrated company's optimal-order equation (5) supplies the benchmark:

F(QT∗)=p+g2−cp+g2−c3.F(Q_T^*)=\frac{p+g_2-c}{p+g_2-c_3}.F(QT∗​)=p+g2​−c3​p+g2​−c​.

The retailer's optimal-order equation (7) includes both F(Q)F(Q)F(Q) and F((1−R)Q)F((1-R)Q)F((1−R)Q). Substituting the integrated benchmark gives equation (10), the common comparison used for the two endpoint policies. The first three milestones formalize these conditions, including existence of an integrated optimum. The last two milestones record the separate calculations in the appendix for full-credit returns and no returns. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170–171, 175

The mission goal combines Theorems 1 and 2 as the article does immediately after stating them. With R=1,c2=c1R=1,c_2=c_1R=1,c2​=c1​ or with R=0R=0R=0, every system-optimal order fails to be retailer-optimal:

arg max⁡Q≥0EPT(Q)≠∅,arg max⁡Q≥0EPT(Q)∩arg max⁡Q≥0EPR(Q)=∅.\operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_T(Q)\ne\varnothing,\qquad \operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_T(Q)\cap \operatorname*{arg\,max}_{Q\ge0}EP_R(Q)=\varnothing.Q≥0argmax​EPT​(Q)=∅,Q≥0argmax​EPT​(Q)∩Q≥0argmax​EPR​(Q)=∅.

The disjointness claim is read separately for each endpoint policy. It says more than merely finding one order on which the firms disagree: neither endpoint policy can induce the retailer to choose a system optimum. Pasternack (1985), Theorems 1–2 and following paragraph, p. 171

What the result establishes

The result separates a policy that reimburses all unsold stock at full wholesale price from one that offers no return option. Both may be simple to administer, but neither aligns the retailer's stocking choice with the integrated company's choice under the article's cost ordering. The result makes the paper's subsequent search for partial-credit terms substantive: the coordinating policy lies away from these two endpoints. It does not say that either endpoint always gives a loss, or that a retailer cannot make a profit. The claim concerns the order that maximizes expected channel profit. Pasternack (1985), pp. 171–172

The known result is proved in the article, but its definitions and theorem statements have not been machine-checked as part of this mission. Formalization gives a reusable account of the paper's piecewise expected profits, feasible order quantities and return fraction, and makes explicit the conditions under which the endpoint conclusions hold. Related proved platform statements include Snyder and Shen's wholesale coordination and wholesale under-ordering. They are not imported: their contract data require 0≤v<cr0\le v<c_r0≤v<cr​, while Pasternack's retailer has no separate own unit cost and the article does not require nonnegative salvage value.

The difficult boundary cases

The claim is sensitive to the demand model. If demand is deterministic, its CDF has a jump, and an order exactly equal to demand can be optimal under both the integrated profit and unlimited full-credit returns. The paper assumes a demand density; continuity of the CDF is therefore material to Theorem 1. Flat parts of a continuous CDF pose a different issue: a theorem identifying just one optimum would lose some orders, so the milestone conditions identify whole sets of maximizers. Pasternack (1985), p. 170, definition of fff and (4)–(7)

The no-return case also depends on the meaning of the manufacturer's additional goodwill cost. The paper names g1g_1g1​ as a cost but does not print a separate nonnegativity inequality. If it were allowed to be negative, the appendix's contradiction with c1>cc_1>cc1​>c could disappear. The formalization states g1≥0g_1\ge0g1​≥0, along with g≥0g\ge0g≥0, and identifies this convention openly. Pasternack (1985), pp. 170, 175

Formalization scope

Lean uses a probability measure DDD supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with finite first moment in place of a named density fff. The theorems assume that DDD has no atoms, giving the continuous CDF needed by the paper's first order conditions. The profit definitions retain the piecewise formulas of (3), (6) and (8), including the thresholds (1−R)Q(1-R)Q(1−R)Q and QQQ. Adjacent pieces agree at their boundaries. The fixed retail price and the fraction R∈[0,1]R\in[0,1]R∈[0,1] match the paper's setting. The cost ordering is split between fixed costs and an admissible policy, because the theorem compares particular policy choices.

Only Q≥0Q\ge0Q≥0 is feasible. An optimal-order predicate includes this membership as well as maximality, and coordination compares complete argmax sets. The goal explicitly asserts that a system optimum exists, preventing a vacuous conclusion about orders when there are none. At R=0R=0R=0 the retailer profit is independent of c2c_2c2​, so the goal quantifies over every credit without imposing an unused bound on it. The denominator p+g2−c3p+g_2-c_3p+g2​−c3​ is positive under c3<c<pc_3<c<pc3​<c<p and g,g1≥0g,g_1\ge0g,g1​≥0. Contributions that develop the optimal-order characterizations, the substitution identity, or the endpoint contradictions within these conventions directly support the goal.

Selected references

  • Barry Alan Pasternack, Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities, Marketing Science 4(2):166–176, 1985. DOI: 10.1287/mksc.4.2.166.
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities I: Unlimited Returns at Partial Credit Coordinate the Channel for Every Demand DistributionResearch Paper

Motivation

A manufacturer of a perishable good (newspapers, magazines, bread, seasonal fashion, printed books) sells through a retailer who must commit to an order before demand is known. Unsold units lose most of their value; unmet demand costs goodwill. When the retailer alone bears the risk of leftovers, it orders less than an integrated firm would, and the channel as a whole earns less. This inefficiency is the double marginalization of the newsvendor problem, and return policies, under which the manufacturer buys back unsold units, are the instrument publishers and other suppliers of perishable goods actually use against it.

Barry Alan Pasternack's paper Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities (Marketing Science, 1985) was the first to show, in a single-period newsvendor model, which return policies restore the integrated firm's order quantity. It became the starting point of the literature on supply-chain contracts: buy-back contracts are now a textbook chapter (Cachon 2003; Snyder and Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory), and the paper's result is the standard example of a contract that coordinates a channel while letting the two firms split the profit.

Setting

A manufacturer produces at unit cost ccc. A retailer sells at the fixed retail price ppp. Leftover units are salvaged at c3c_3c3​ per unit. Each unit of unmet demand costs the retailer a goodwill penalty g≥0g \ge 0g≥0 and the manufacturer an additional penalty g1≥0g_1 \ge 0g1​≥0; write g2=g+g1g_2 = g + g_1g2​=g+g1​. The data satisfy c3<c<pc_3 < c < pc3​<c<p.

The manufacturer chooses a policy (c1,c2,R)(c_1, c_2, R)(c1​,c2​,R): the retailer pays c1c_1c1​ per unit ordered and may return up to the fraction R∈[0,1]R \in [0,1]R∈[0,1] of its order QQQ for a credit c2c_2c2​ per unit. The paper assumes

c3<c<c1<p,c3<c2≤c1<p.(1), (2)c_3 < c < c_1 < p, \qquad c_3 < c_2 \le c_1 < p. \qquad (1),\ (2)c3​<c<c1​<p,c3​<c2​≤c1​<p.(1), (2)

Demand X≥0X \ge 0X≥0 is random with distribution function FFF. Three expected profits are defined as functions of the order QQQ: EPT(Q)EP_T(Q)EPT​(Q), equation (3), the profit of a company store in which the manufacturer sells directly; EPR(Q)EP_R(Q)EPR​(Q), equation (6), the independent retailer's profit under the policy; and EPM(Q)EP_M(Q)EPM​(Q), equation (8), the manufacturer's profit when the retailer orders QQQ. An optimal order for a profit function is a Q≥0Q \ge 0Q≥0 maximizing it over [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞). The policy coordinates the channel when the retailer's optimal orders are exactly the company store's optimal orders: the decentralized channel then produces the integrated firm's quantity.

The Lean development uses the same letters: Costs carries c,c3,p,g,g1c, c_3, p, g, g_1c,c3​,p,g,g1​; Costs.Admissible K c1 c2 R is (1)–(2) with 0≤R≤10 \le R \le 10≤R≤1; EPT, EPR, EPM are (3), (6), (8); IsOptimalOrder and Coordinates are the two notions just defined; FFF is cdf D for a demand law D.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

A policy which allows for unlimited returns at partial credit will be system optimal for appropriately chosen values of c1c_1c1​ and c2c_2c2​. Precisely, for every price c1c_1c1​ with c<c1<pc < c_1 < pc<c1​<p there is a credit c2c_2c2​ with

c3<c2<c1,c1=(p+g)−(p+g2−c)(p+g−c2)p+g2−c3(11),c_3 < c_2 < c_1, \qquad c_1 = (p+g) - \frac{(p+g_2-c)(p+g-c_2)}{p+g_2-c_3} \quad (11),c3​<c2​<c1​,c1​=(p+g)−p+g2​−c3​(p+g2​−c)(p+g−c2​)​(11),

such that the policy (c1,c2,R=1)(c_1, c_2, R = 1)(c1​,c2​,R=1) coordinates the channel for every continuous demand distribution on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with finite mean. The credit is chosen before, and independently of, the demand law.

Milestones

  1. (4)–(5): the company store has an optimal order, and QQQ is optimal iff F(Q)=(p+g2−c)/(p+g2−c3)F(Q) = (p+g_2-c)/(p+g_2-c_3)F(Q)=(p+g2​−c)/(p+g2​−c3​).
  2. (7): under an admissible policy, QQQ is optimal for the retailer iff 0=−c1+p+g−F(Q)[p+g−c2]−F((1−R)Q)[(1−R)(c2−c3)]0 = -c_1 + p + g - F(Q)[p+g-c_2] - F((1-R)Q)[(1-R)(c_2-c_3)]0=−c1​+p+g−F(Q)[p+g−c2​]−F((1−R)Q)[(1−R)(c2​−c3​)].
  3. (9)–(10): an admissible policy coordinates the channel iff (10) holds at every system-optimal order.
  4. (11): with R=1R = 1R=1 and c2<c1c_2 < c_1c2​<c1​, coordination holds iff (11) holds, whatever the demand law.
  5. Appendix, proof of Theorem 3: for c<c1<pc < c_1 < pc<c1​<p, (11) has a solution c2c_2c2​ with c3<c2<c1c_3 < c_2 < c_1c3​<c2​<c1​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 says that a buy-back contract with full returns at a partial credit aligns the retailer's incentives with the channel's, and that the coordinating credit depends only on costs. The second point carries the paper's practical conclusion: a manufacturer selling one product to many retailers with different demand distributions can post one price and one return credit and still have every retailer order its system-optimal quantity. The one-parameter family of coordinating pairs (c1,c2)(c_1, c_2)(c1​,c2​) then splits the channel profit between the firms. The companion mission (Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities II) formalizes the negative results, Theorems 1 and 2: neither full credit with unlimited returns nor a no-returns policy coordinates.

Formalizing it. The paper's proofs are first-order conditions and a short algebraic argument. A machine-checked version adds three things. It makes the analytic content explicit: existence of the system optimum, global optimality of the first-order conditions for an arbitrary atomless demand law, and the quantifier structure "one credit for all demand laws". It repairs a gap: the printed argument for c3<c2c_3 < c_2c3​<c2​ establishes only c2>c3−g1c_2 > c_3 - g_1c2​>c3​−g1​, which suffices only when g1=0g_1 = 0g1​=0, although the claim holds for all g1≥0g_1 \ge 0g1​≥0. And it gives a reusable newsvendor layer with returns. Related results are proved on Prove2Me in a different model: Snyder–Shen's SupplyChainTheory.buyback_coordinates (Theorem 14.4) and SupplyChainTheory.buyback_profit_identities. They are not referenced here, because their contract data require a retailer cost cr>v≥0c_r > v \ge 0cr​>v≥0, which excludes Pasternack's retailer (no own cost), and because they fix the buy-back price and derive the wholesale price, with no range claim.

Difficulty

The algebraic core, milestone 5, is short. The work sits in the analytic milestones. Differentiating under the integral sign in (3) and (6) needs the integrands' piecewise structure and the absence of atoms; the global-maximum claim needs concavity of the expected profits on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), including the boundary Q=0Q = 0Q=0. Coordination is a statement about sets of maximizers, not about one first-order condition: when FFF is flat at the critical fractile, the optimal orders form an interval, and showing that the retailer's maximizers coincide with the system's requires the monotonicity of the retailer's marginal profit, strict where FFF increases. The naive reading "both first-order conditions hold at QT∗Q^*_TQT∗​" proves one inclusion only.

Formalization scope

Demand is a probability measure D on R\mathbb RR with D (Iio 0) = 0 and finite mean (IsDemand), and FFF is cdf D. The paper's density is the hypothesis NullSingletonClass D (no atoms), imposed on each theorem that uses it. The expected profits are Lean integrals of the paper's piecewise integrands, written with if. The goodwill costs satisfy g,g1≥0g, g_1 \ge 0g,g1​≥0, implicit in the paper. RRR is a fraction in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Optimal orders are maximizers over Q≥0Q \ge 0Q≥0 that are themselves ≥0\ge 0≥0. Coordination is equality of the retailer's and the company store's sets of optimal orders. The denominator p+g2−c3p + g_2 - c_3p+g2​−c3​ is positive under these assumptions, so no division is degenerate.

The goal is not the algebraic statement "there is c2∈(c3,c1)c_2 \in (c_3, c_1)c2​∈(c3​,c1​) solving (11)": that is milestone 5. A formalization of Theorem 3 must conclude Coordinates, a statement about the maximizers of the actual profit functions (3) and (6), and must place the quantifier over demand laws inside the existence of c2c_2c2​.

A complete development needs: differentiation of parametric integrals with piecewise-linear integrands, concavity of the newsvendor profit, the intermediate value theorem for continuous distribution functions, and the critical-fractile characterization. The newsvendor layer (milestones 1 and 2) is reusable for any single-period contract model. Proofs of the milestones, alternative proofs (for example via the identity EPR=k⋅EPT+constEP_R = k \cdot EP_T + \text{const}EPR​=k⋅EPT​+const under (11), which also removes the no-atoms hypothesis), and the profit formulas (12)–(14) at the coordinated optimum are all welcome.

Selected references

  • B. A. Pasternack, Optimal Pricing and Return Policies for Perishable Commodities, Marketing Science 4(2):166–176, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1287/mksc.4.2.166
  • G. P. Cachon, Supply Chain Coordination with Contracts, in Handbooks in Operations Research and Management Science 11, 2003, 227–339. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0927-0507(03)11006-7
  • L. V. Snyder and Z.-J. M. Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2019. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781119584445
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 1: In the Convex Case Progressive Hedging Converges to Optimal Solutions of (P) and (D) Exactly When They ExistResearch Paper

Motivation

Decisions under uncertainty are often modelled by a finite set of scenarios: possible futures s∈Ss\in Ss∈S with weights psp_sps​, each with its own optimization problem. Solving every scenario separately is easy but useless in practice, because the decision taken today cannot depend on which scenario will be revealed tomorrow. Progressive hedging, introduced by Rockafellar and Wets in Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty (IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1), 1991), restores this nonanticipativity by iterating between scenario-wise solves and an averaging step, guided by price systems that act as multipliers. It is the standard decomposition method for multistage stochastic programs and is implemented in widely used software such as PySP/mpi-sppy. This mission formalizes the paper's convergence theorem in the convex case, Theorem 5.1, together with the duality theory of §4 and the proof steps of §5 it rests on.

Setting

Let SSS be a finite set of scenarios with weights ps>0p_s>0ps​>0, ∑sps=1\sum_s p_s=1∑s​ps​=1. For each sss the scenario subproblem (Ps)(P_s)(Ps​) is to minimize fs(x)f_s(x)fs​(x) over x∈Cs⊂Rnx\in C_s\subset\mathbb R^nx∈Cs​⊂Rn, where CsC_sCs​ is nonempty and closed and fsf_sfs​ is locally Lipschitz with bounded level sets {x∈Cs∣fs(x)≤α}\{x\in C_s\mid f_s(x)\le\alpha\}{x∈Cs​∣fs​(x)≤α}. The convex case is when every fsf_sfs​ and CsC_sCs​ is convex.

A decision vector is split by time, x=(x1,…,xT)x=(x_1,\dots,x_T)x=(x1​,…,xT​). A policy is a map X:S→RnX:S\to\mathbb R^nX:S→Rn; the policy space E\mathcal EE carries the inner product ⟨X,Y⟩=∑spsX(s)⋅Y(s)\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_s p_s X(s)\cdot Y(s)⟨X,Y⟩=∑s​ps​X(s)⋅Y(s) and norm ∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|=\langle X,X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2. At each time ttt the scenarios are partitioned into bundles A∈AtA\in\mathcal A_tA∈At​ of scenarios that cannot yet be told apart. The aggregation X^=JX\hat X=JXX^=JX replaces Xt(s)X_t(s)Xt​(s) by its ppp-weighted average over the bundle of sss at time ttt, and K=I−JK=I-JK=I−J. The implementable policies are N={X∣Xt\mathcal N=\{X\mid X_tN={X∣Xt​ constant on each A∈At}A\in\mathcal A_t\}A∈At​}, the price systems are M={W∣JW=0}=N⊥\mathcal M=\{W\mid JW=0\}=\mathcal N^\perpM={W∣JW=0}=N⊥, and the admissible policies are C={X∣X(s)∈Cs ∀s}\mathcal C=\{X\mid X(s)\in C_s\ \forall s\}C={X∣X(s)∈Cs​ ∀s}. With F(X)=∑spsfs(X(s))F(X)=\sum_s p_s f_s(X(s))F(X)=∑s​ps​fs​(X(s)) the problem is

(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.(P)\qquad \text{minimize } F(X) \text{ subject to } X\in\mathcal C\cap\mathcal N .(P)minimize F(X) subject to X∈C∩N.

Its Lagrangian is L(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩L(X,W)=F(X)+\langle X,W\rangleL(X,W)=F(X)+⟨X,W⟩ on C×M\mathcal C\times\mathcal MC×M, the dual is (D)(D)(D): maximize G(W)=inf⁡X∈CL(X,W)G(W)=\inf_{X\in\mathcal C}L(X,W)G(W)=infX∈C​L(X,W) over W∈MW\in\mathcal MW∈M with G(W)>−∞G(W)>-\inftyG(W)>−∞.

The progressive hedging algorithm fixes r>0r>0r>0, starts from any X0X^0X0 and any W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M, and in iteration ν\nuν sets X^ν=JXν\hat X^\nu=JX^\nuX^ν=JXν, lets Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) minimize

fs(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+12r ∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Csf_s(x)+x\cdot W^\nu(s)+\tfrac12 r\,|x-\hat X^\nu(s)|^2\quad\text{over } x\in C_sfs​(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+21​r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2over x∈Cs​

for every scenario, and updates Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1W^{\nu+1}=W^\nu+rKX^{\nu+1}Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

In the convex case with exact minimization, the sequences {X^ν}\{\hat X^\nu\}{X^ν} and {Wν}\{W^\nu\}{Wν} are bounded if and only if (P) and (D) have optimal solutions. In that case there are optimal X∗X^*X∗ for (P) and W∗W^*W∗ for (D) with

X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,\hat X^\nu\to X^*,\qquad W^\nu\to W^*,X^ν→X∗,Wν→W∗,

and, with ∥(X,W)∥r=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2\|(X,W)\|_r=(\|X\|^2+r^{-2}\|W\|^2)^{1/2}∥(X,W)∥r​=(∥X∥2+r−2∥W∥2)1/2,

∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r\le\|(\hat X^{\nu},W^{\nu})-(X^*,W^*)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​≤∥(X^ν,Wν)−(X∗,W∗)∥r​

for all ν≥0\nu\ge0ν≥0, strictly unless (X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)=(X^*,W^*)(X^ν,Wν)=(X∗,W∗), and the step lengths ∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r\|(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})-(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\|_r∥(X^ν+1,Wν+1)−(X^ν,Wν)∥r​ are nonincreasing from ν=1\nu=1ν=1 on.

Milestones

  1. Propositions 3.1–3.3: existence for the scenario subproblems, the lower bound α^=min⁡CF=E{min⁡(Ps)}≤min⁡(P)\hat\alpha=\min_{\mathcal C}F=E\{\min(P_s)\}\le\min(P)α^=minC​F=E{min(Ps​)}≤min(P), well-posedness of every modified subproblem (unique solution in the convex case), and compact level sets of FFF on C\mathcal CC.
  2. Theorem 4.2 and Proposition 4.4 (in the convex case): the scenario-wise subgradient conditions −W∗(s)∈∂fs(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))-W^*(s)\in\partial f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W∗(s)∈∂fs​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s)) are equivalent to a saddle point of LLL, and the analogous conditions are necessary and sufficient for the iterates.
  3. Proposition 4.5 and Theorem 4.6: the perturbation function Φ(U)=min⁡{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U}\Phi(U)=\min\{F(X)\mid X\in\mathcal C,\ KX=U\}Φ(U)=min{F(X)∣X∈C, KX=U} and the duality −∞<min⁡(P)=sup⁡(D)-\infty<\min(P)=\sup(D)−∞<min(P)=sup(D), argmax⁡(D)=−∂Φ(0)\operatorname{argmax}(D)=-\partial\Phi(0)argmax(D)=−∂Φ(0).
  4. Proposition 5.3: each iteration is the unique saddle point of a proximal saddle function.
  5. From the proof of Theorem 5.1: firm nonexpansiveness (5.26) of the iteration map in ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​, and the identification of its fixed points with primal–dual optimal pairs.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 is the guarantee behind progressive hedging in the convex case: solving only small scenario problems and averaging, the method finds a nonanticipative optimal policy and an optimal price system whenever these exist, with a distance to the solution that never increases. The dual sequence WνW^\nuWν converges to a solution of (D), which gives the prices of information that the paper interprets economically. Boundedness of the iterates is an exact test for solvability.

The result is classical and fully proved on paper; its proof reduces the algorithm to Rockafellar's proximal point algorithm for a maximal monotone operator. No machine-checked version is known to exist. The mission produces a formal statement and, eventually, a proof of the full chain from scenario data to convergence, including the duality theorem of §4, which is of independent use for scenario-based stochastic programming. A related platform mission in this series treats the nonconvex case (limits of the algorithm satisfy first-order conditions).

Difficulty

The algorithm is not a proximal point method in the variable XXX: it acts on the pair (X^,W)(\hat X,W)(X^,W), and the averaged policy X^ν\hat X^\nuX^ν is in general not admissible while XνX^\nuXν is in general not implementable. The step that fails in a direct attempt is showing that the map (X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1)(\hat X^\nu,W^\nu)\mapsto(\hat X^{\nu+1},W^{\nu+1})(X^ν,Wν)↦(X^ν+1,Wν+1) is firmly nonexpansive, which requires recognizing it as the resolvent of the monotone operator of a saddle function restricted to N×M\mathcal N\times\mathcal MN×M, in the rescaled norm ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ rather than in the original product norm. A second difficulty is duality: identifying the fixed points of the iteration with optimal pairs of (P) and (D) needs the convex duality theory of §4 for an extended-real-valued perturbation function without any constraint qualification.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); policies are functions S → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with S a Fintype. Time periods are a monotone map assigning each coordinate to its period, and each At\mathcal A_tAt​ is a Setoid S; no refinement between periods is assumed. The standing assumptions of §3 are fields of the model structure, and the convex case is a separate hypothesis.

The inner product (2.2), norm (2.3) and ∥⋅∥r\|\cdot\|_r∥⋅∥r​ (5.2) are explicit weighted sums. Mathlib's norm on a function type is the sup norm; it is used only for topology (boundedness, convergence, local Lipschitz continuity, compactness), which coincides with that of (2.3) in finite dimension. Stating (5.3) or (5.26) with Mathlib's sup norm would change the inequalities and is ruled out. Optimal values min⁡(P)\min(P)min(P), sup⁡(D)\sup(D)sup(D), GGG, Φ\PhiΦ, α^\hat\alphaα^ and ℓ\ellℓ are EReal infima and suprema, so that infeasibility gives +∞+\infty+∞ and an unbounded dual objective gives −∞-\infty−∞; real-valued sInf would silently return 000 there. A solution of (D) must have G(W∗)>−∞G(W^*)>-\inftyG(W∗)>−∞. The algorithm is a predicate on sequences, with X0X^0X0 arbitrary and W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M; Proposition 3.2 shows the predicate is satisfiable.

Subgradients and normal cones are those of convex analysis; the normal cone is the published definition FirstOrderOpt.ConvexTheory.normalCone. Not formalized: the nonconvex (Clarke) parts of §4, the linear-quadratic case and its rate result, and inexact minimization.

A complete development needs: separable minimization over product sets, finite-dimensional compactness arguments, convex duality for a perturbation function on a subspace, and the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators (Rockafellar 1976, Theorem 1 and Proposition 1). The last two are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of either as standalone results are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987; Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1):119–147, 1991. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/2933/ — https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.1.119
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14(5):877–898, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • G. J. Minty, Monotone (nonlinear) operators in Hilbert space, Duke Mathematical Journal 29(3):341–346, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-62-02933-2
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations II: Schur-Complement Criterion — A₁₁ Nonsingular and (A/A₁₁) Positive Definite Make (A + ∂ψ_{ℝʳ×K})⁻¹ Lipschitz on ℝ^{r+s}; for K = ℝˢ₊, P-Matrix IffResearch Paper

Motivation

A constrained system can be written as a generalized equation: a smooth or linear expression must balance the normal cone of a feasible set. This form includes variational inequalities and the first-order conditions of many optimization problems. It is useful to know whether a small change in the right-hand side determines one nearby solution and how far that solution moves. In the linear finite-dimensional case, Robinson's Theorem 3.1 gives matrix conditions that guarantee something stronger: a unique solution for every right-hand side, with one Lipschitz bound valid over the entire space. The theorem also identifies an exact matrix criterion when the feasible set is a product with a nonnegative orthant.

The question is relevant whenever some coordinates of a system are free and others are constrained by inequalities. Eliminating the free coordinates produces a smaller matrix, the Schur complement. The resulting condition can be checked on the reduced block, and in the orthant case it becomes the familiar P-matrix criterion from linear complementarity. Robinson states both claims in a single theorem and relates them to the behavior of a generalized equation rather than to an isolated matrix property Robinson, pp. 51–52.

Setting

Let r,sr,sr,s be positive integers and give Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s its Euclidean norm. Write w=(w1,w2)w=(w_1,w_2)w=(w1​,w2​), with w1∈Rrw_1\in\mathbb R^rw1​∈Rr and w2∈Rsw_2\in\mathbb R^sw2​∈Rs. Let K⊆RsK\subseteq\mathbb R^sK⊆Rs be nonempty, closed, and convex, and put D=Rr×KD=\mathbb R^r\times KD=Rr×K. For w∈Dw\in Dw∈D, the normal cone is

ND(w)={v∈Rr+s:⟨v,c−w⟩≤0 for every c∈D}.N_D(w)=\{v\in\mathbb R^{r+s}:\langle v,c-w\rangle\leq0\text{ for every }c\in D\}.ND​(w)={v∈Rr+s:⟨v,c−w⟩≤0 for every c∈D}.

For w∉Dw\notin Dw∈/D, ND(w)N_D(w)ND​(w) is empty. Thus the inclusion y∈Aw+ND(w)y\in Aw+N_D(w)y∈Aw+ND​(w) itself enforces feasibility. This is Robinson's indicator-subdifferential convention Robinson, pp. 43 and 51.

Partition the real square matrix AAA into blocks A11A_{11}A11​, A12A_{12}A12​, A21A_{21}A21​, and A22A_{22}A22​, where A11A_{11}A11​ is r×rr\times rr×r. When A11A_{11}A11​ is nonsingular, its Schur complement in AAA is

A/A11=A22−A21A11−1A12.A/A_{11}=A_{22}-A_{21}A_{11}^{-1}A_{12}.A/A11​=A22​−A21​A11−1​A12​.

A real matrix MMM is positive definite in the theorem's sense when v⊤Mv>0v^\top Mv>0v⊤Mv>0 for every nonzero vvv. Symmetry is not assumed. A P-matrix has strictly positive determinants for every nonempty principal submatrix. Write R+s\mathbb R^s_+R+s​ for the vectors with all components nonnegative. These conventions are stated or used in Theorem 3.1 and its proof.

Formalization targets

General closed convex set

For TK(w)=Aw+NRr×K(w)T_K(w)=Aw+N_{\mathbb R^r\times K}(w)TK​(w)=Aw+NRr×K​(w), the first target is the sufficient condition

det⁡A11≠0andv⊤(A/A11)v>0  (v≠0)⟹TK−1:Rr+s→Rr+s is Lipschitz.\det A_{11}\ne0\quad\text{and}\quad v^\top(A/A_{11})v>0\;(v\ne0) \quad\Longrightarrow\quad T_K^{-1}:\mathbb R^{r+s}\to\mathbb R^{r+s}\text{ is Lipschitz}.detA11​=0andv⊤(A/A11​)v>0(v=0)⟹TK−1​:Rr+s→Rr+s is Lipschitz.

Here “is Lipschitz” includes that exactly one inverse value exists at every yyy. The assertion holds for every nonempty closed convex KKK; it is not restricted to polyhedral sets.

Nonnegative orthant

When K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​, the second target is an equivalence:

TR+s−1 is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz⟺det⁡A11≠0 and A/A11 is a P-matrix.T_{\mathbb R^s_+}^{-1}\text{ is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz} \quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad \det A_{11}\ne0\text{ and }A/A_{11}\text{ is a P-matrix}.TR+s​−1​ is everywhere defined, single-valued and Lipschitz⟺detA11​=0 and A/A11​ is a P-matrix.

The goal theorem is the conjunction of these two statements, matching Theorem 3.1. Its milestones record the paper's local upper Lipschitz assertion for polyhedral multifunctions, the block reduction, the reduced inverse result, the complementarity characterization, and the necessity of nonsingularity.

Significance

The first part gives a global sensitivity guarantee for a generalized equation with an arbitrary nonempty closed convex lower-block constraint. For any two right-hand sides, their unique solutions differ by at most a fixed multiple of the distance between those right-hand sides. The second part tells when this guarantee holds for the orthant model: the P-matrix condition is necessary as well as sufficient. These are the precise conclusions of Robinson's theorem; the mission concerns their machine-checked formalization, not an unresolved mathematical conjecture.

A complete development would provide reusable definitions of the normal-cone generalized equation, an explicitly nonsymmetric notion of positive definiteness, P-matrices, and the global inverse property. It would also formalize the linear complementarity characterization quoted in the paper. The current draft has Lean-checked statements with proof placeholders. No proof of Theorem 3.1 or of its milestones is claimed here.

Difficulty

Nonsingularity of the full matrix AAA alone does not decide whether the constrained inverse exists uniquely: the normal cone can change as w2w_2w2​ reaches different faces of KKK. A pointwise uniqueness argument also does not by itself supply one Lipschitz constant on all of Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s. For the orthant case, checking only the full determinant or leading principal minors would miss the criterion Robinson invokes; every nonempty principal minor matters. The difficulty is to connect a global statement about all right-hand sides with the reduced matrix condition while preserving the normal cone's behavior at boundary points Robinson, pp. 51–52.

Formalization scope

Lean represents Rr+s\mathbb R^{r+s}Rr+s as a Euclidean space indexed by the disjoint union of Fin(r)\mathrm{Fin}(r)Fin(r) and Fin(s)\mathrm{Fin}(s)Fin(s). This gives the paper's Euclidean norm rather than the sup norm of a product type. The normal cone is empty off its set, and the inverse property explicitly requires existence for every right-hand side, uniqueness, and one global real Lipschitz bound. The Schur complement appears only with a nonsingular A11A_{11}A11​ in the substantive claims; matrix inversion on a singular input would otherwise be totalized by Lean. Positive definiteness does not add a symmetry hypothesis. The goal retains r,s>0r,s>0r,s>0 as printed; the paper's later remark about zero-dimensional blocks is outside this theorem.

The polyhedral milestones use finite intersections of closed half-spaces. The reduced-operator milestone uses a nonempty closed convex KKK, matching the theorem's setting. The LCP milestone allows any finite dimension; at dimension zero, both its universal uniqueness statement and its empty-minor P-matrix condition hold. A weaker encoding in which the inverse is merely single-valued where it happens to exist would erase the global conclusion and is excluded here.

Solvers can contribute the block-normal-cone equivalence, the global inverse statement for the reduced operator, the polyhedral Lipschitz result, the P-matrix characterization, and the final theorem. The normal-cone and matrix definitions can also serve later generalized-equation missions that use the same conventions.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly Regular Generalized Equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 43–62, 1980. DOI 10.1287/moor.5.1.43.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations I: Implicit-Function Theorem — the Solution x(p) of 0 ∈ f(p, x) + ∂ψ_C(x) Is Locally Unique with ‖x(p) − x(q)‖ ≤ (λ + ε)‖f(p, x(q)) − f(q, x(q))‖Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems of optimization and equilibrium can be written as one inclusion. Some examples are the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker conditions of a nonlinear program, nonlinear complementarity problems, variational inequalities and the equilibrium conditions of economic and traffic models. In each of them a point xxx has to satisfy 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x). In applications the data fff depend on parameters: estimated coefficients, prices, or the iterate of an algorithm. One then wants to know whether a solution persists under a perturbation of the parameter, whether it stays locally unique, and how fast it moves. For a smooth equation f(p,x)=0f(p, x) = 0f(p,x)=0 the classical implicit-function theorem answers all three questions. Inequality constraints make the solution set nonsmooth, and the classical theorem no longer applies.

S. M. Robinson's paper Strongly regular generalized equations (Math. Oper. Res. 5 (1980) 43–62) introduced the condition of strong regularity and proved an implicit-function theorem for generalized equations under it. The condition and the theorem became the starting point of the stability theory of variational inequalities and nonlinear programs. Later work characterises strong regularity for nonlinear programs (Robinson's own §4, through the strong second-order sufficient condition), and develops it in the theory of metric regularity and of single-valued Lipschitz localisations (Dontchev–Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, Springer 2009/2014). Its sensitivity results underlie the convergence analysis of Newton and sequential quadratic programming methods for these problems.

This mission formalizes §1–§2 of the paper: the definition, the implicit-function theorem (Theorem 2.1) with its proof, and the three results derived from it.

Setting

Let XXX be a real normed linear space and X′X'X′ its topological dual, the continuous linear functionals on XXX. Let C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X be closed and convex. The normal-cone operator of CCC is

∂ψC(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},x∈C,∅,x∉C.\partial\psi_C(x) = \begin{cases} \{y \in X' : y(c - x) \le 0 \text{ for all } c \in C\}, & x \in C, \\ \emptyset, & x \notin C. \end{cases}∂ψC​(x)={{y∈X′:y(c−x)≤0 for all c∈C},∅,​x∈C,x∈/C.​

A generalized equation is the inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x), for a function fff from an open set Ω⊆X\Omega \subseteq XΩ⊆X to X′X'X′. For C=XC = XC=X it is the equation f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0. For CCC the nonnegative orthant of Rn\mathbb R^nRn it is the nonlinear complementarity problem. For a general closed convex CCC it is the variational inequality over CCC.

Let x0∈Ωx_0 \in \Omegax0​∈Ω solve the generalized equation, and let fff be Fréchet differentiable at x0x_0x0​. Linearising fff gives the multifunction

Tx=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x).T x = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x).Tx=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x).

The generalized equation is strongly regular at x0x_0x0​ with associated Lipschitz constant λ\lambdaλ if there are neighbourhoods UUU of 000 in X′X'X′ and VVV of x0x_0x0​ with the following property: for every y∈Uy \in Uy∈U the inclusion y∈Txy \in Txy∈Tx has exactly one solution s(y)s(y)s(y) in VVV, and ∥s(y1)−s(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥\|s(y_1) - s(y_2)\| \le \lambda \|y_1 - y_2\|∥s(y1​)−s(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ on UUU. The condition depends only on f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) and CCC.

In the parametric problem the function is f(p,x)f(p, x)f(p,x), with ppp in a topological space PPP and base point p0p_0p0​. Its partial derivative in xxx is f′(p,x)f'(p, x)f′(p,x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (p. 45)

Assume that f′f'f′ exists on P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω, that fff and f′f'f′ are continuous at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), and that x0x_0x0​ solves 0∈f(p0,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p_0, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p0​,x)+∂ψC​(x), strongly regularly with constant λ\lambdaλ. Then for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there are neighbourhoods NεN_\varepsilonNε​ of p0p_0p0​ and WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of x0x_0x0​, and a function x:Nε→Wεx : N_\varepsilon \to W_\varepsilonx:Nε​→Wε​, with two properties. First, x(p)x(p)x(p) is the unique solution in WεW_\varepsilonWε​ of 0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x)+∂ψC​(x). Second,

∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε) ∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε).\|x(p) - x(q)\| \le (\lambda + \varepsilon)\,\|f(p, x(q)) - f(q, x(q))\| \qquad (p, q \in N_\varepsilon).∥x(p)−x(q)∥≤(λ+ε)∥f(p,x(q))−f(q,x(q))∥(p,q∈Nε​).

Milestones: the steps of the proof (p. 46)

Write LLL for the linearisation at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​), r(p,x)=f(p0,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)−f(p,x)r(p, x) = f(p_0, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) - f(p, x)r(p,x)=f(p0​,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)−f(p,x) for the residual, and Φp(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]\Phi_p(x) = V \cap L^{-1}[r(p, x)]Φp​(x)=V∩L−1[r(p,x)]. The milestones are four claims of the proof:

  1. On the closed ball VεV_\varepsilonVε​, the fixed points of Φp\Phi_pΦp​ are exactly the solutions of the perturbed inclusion.
  2. ∥Φp(x1)−Φp(x2)∥≤λδ∥x1−x2∥\|\Phi_p(x_1) - \Phi_p(x_2)\| \le \lambda\delta \|x_1 - x_2\|∥Φp​(x1​)−Φp​(x2​)∥≤λδ∥x1​−x2​∥ on VεV_\varepsilonVε​.
  3. Φp\Phi_pΦp​ maps VεV_\varepsilonVε​ into itself.
  4. The contraction principle on VεV_\varepsilonVε​, with the bound ∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp(x)−x∥\|x(p) - x\| \le (1 - \lambda\delta)^{-1} \|\Phi_p(x) - x\|∥x(p)−x∥≤(1−λδ)−1∥Φp​(x)−x∥ (2.5).

Companion results

  • Corollary 2.2 (pp. 46–47). If PPP lies in a normed space and ∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥\|f(p, x) - f(q, x)\| \le \nu \|p - q\|∥f(p,x)−f(q,x)∥≤ν∥p−q∥, then x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) is Lipschitzian with modulus ν(λ+ε)\nu(\lambda + \varepsilon)ν(λ+ε).
  • Theorem 2.3 (p. 47). Let Φp(x0)\Phi_p(x_0)Φp​(x0​) be the unique local solution of the linear generalized equation 0∈f(p,x0)+f′(p0,x0)(x−x0)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(p, x_0) + f'(p_0, x_0)(x - x_0) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(p,x0​)+f′(p0​,x0​)(x−x0​)+∂ψC​(x). Then ∥x(p)−Φp(x0)∥≤αε(p)∥p−p0∥\|x(p) - \Phi_p(x_0)\| \le \alpha_\varepsilon(p)\|p - p_0\|∥x(p)−Φp​(x0​)∥≤αε​(p)∥p−p0​∥, with αε(p)→0\alpha_\varepsilon(p) \to 0αε​(p)→0.
  • Theorem 2.4 (p. 48). This is a perturbation lemma for linear generalized equations 0∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x)0 \in Ax + a + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x). Near (A0,a0)(A_0, a_0)(A0​,a0​) the localised inverse stays single-valued, and it is Lipschitzian with modulus λ(1−λ∥A−A0∥)−1\lambda(1 - \lambda\|A - A_0\|)^{-1}λ(1−λ∥A−A0​∥)−1.
  • The case C=XC = XC=X (remark on p. 45). There strong regularity is equivalent to f′(x0)f'(x_0)f′(x0​) having a continuous linear inverse.
  • Strong regularity is the weakest possible condition (remark on p. 47). For the canonical perturbation f(p,x)=f(x0)+f′(x0)(x−x0)−pf(p,x) = f(x_0) + f'(x_0)(x - x_0) - pf(p,x)=f(x0​)+f′(x0​)(x−x0​)−p, p∈X′p \in X'p∈X′, locally unique solvability with a Lipschitzian solution map x(⋅)x(\cdot)x(⋅) near p0=0p_0 = 0p0​=0 is exactly strong regularity at x0x_0x0​.

Significance

Theorem 2.1 reduces the stability of a nonsmooth problem to a property of one linearised problem at the base point. Once strong regularity is checked at x0x_0x0​, the solution exists, is locally unique and moves in a Lipschitz manner for every nearby parameter. Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 make this quantitative. Theorem 2.3 shows that a linear complementarity problem or a quadratic program approximates the nonlinear solution to first order. Theorem 2.4 is the analogue of Banach's perturbation lemma, which keeps an operator invertible under small perturbations. The later sections of the paper give checkable criteria for strong regularity: a Schur-complement test, a reduced-form test over polyhedral sets, and second-order conditions for nonlinear programs. Those criteria are the subject of the companion missions II–IV.

The theorems have been proved since 1980 and have been restated in textbooks. No machine-checked version of strong regularity or of this implicit-function theorem is known. Mathlib has the classical implicit- and inverse-function theorems for C1C^1C1 maps between Banach spaces, and the contraction mapping principle. It has nothing on normal-cone operators, generalized equations or Lipschitz localisations. The formalization adds this layer. It also shows that Theorem 2.1 needs no completeness of XXX.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to apply the classical implicit-function theorem. It fails because x↦f(x)+∂ψC(x)x \mapsto f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)x↦f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is set-valued and is not differentiable in any useful sense. The inverse is localised only to a neighbourhood VVV and is single-valued only there. So every step must keep the iterates inside sets on which strong regularity says something. The neighbourhoods have to be chosen in the right order: δ\deltaδ from ε\varepsilonε, then UUU and VVV, then the ball radius ρ\rhoρ, then the parameter neighbourhood. The estimate (2.4) has to come out with the constant λ+ε\lambda + \varepsilonλ+ε and no larger. The page applies the contraction principle in a space it calls only normed. A faithful proof must also obtain the fixed point without completeness of XXX, for example through the completeness of X′X'X′.

Formalization scope

  • X′X'X′ is StrongDual ℝ X, the normal cone is a Set (StrongDual ℝ X) that is empty off CCC, and an inclusion 0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x)0 \in f(x) + \partial\psi_C(x)0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x) is written −f(x)∈∂ψC(x)-f(x) \in \partial\psi_C(x)−f(x)∈∂ψC​(x).
  • Strong regularity is a predicate on (C,f(x0),f′(x0),x0,λ)(C, f(x_0), f'(x_0), x_0, \lambda)(C,f(x0​),f′(x0​),x0​,λ) with real λ\lambdaλ. It requires existence, uniqueness in VVV and the Lipschitz bound.
  • fff is a total function P×X→X′P \times X \to X'P×X→X′ whose values off P×ΩP \times \OmegaP×Ω carry no hypothesis. The conclusion therefore asserts Wε⊆ΩW_\varepsilon \subseteq \OmegaWε​⊆Ω.
  • Differentiability is HasFDerivAt at every point of Ω\OmegaΩ, for every ppp. Continuity of f′f'f′ at (p0,x0)(p_0, x_0)(p0​,x0​) is joint and in operator norm.
  • Uniqueness is uniqueness within WεW_\varepsilonWε​, never global. Global uniqueness is false in general. Dropping uniqueness, or quantifying ε\varepsilonε after the neighbourhoods, would trivialize the goal, and the statements are written to exclude both.
  • Theorem 2.1, Corollary 2.2 and Theorem 2.3 do not assume completeness, as printed. Theorem 2.4 assumes a Banach space, as printed.
  • The contraction-principle milestone assumes completeness, under which the principle as invoked holds.
  • Corollary 2.2 asks for its Lipschitz hypothesis on Nε×VεN_\varepsilon \times V_\varepsilonNε​×Vε​, sets that Theorem 2.1 produces. It is therefore stated on fixed neighbourhoods given in advance.
  • Theorem 2.4 also asserts λ∥A−A0∥<1\lambda\|A - A_0\| < 1λ∥A−A0​∥<1, which its proof secures.

A complete development needs the following:

  • the mean-value inequality for Fréchet-differentiable maps on convex sets;
  • the contraction principle on a closed ball;
  • a fixed-point argument that obtains the fixed point through the complete space X′X'X′.

The definitions of normal cone and strong regularity are reusable for variational inequalities in general. Contributions are welcome at any level: proofs of the milestones, the goal from the milestones, or the companion results from the goal.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly regular generalized equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1):43–62, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • A. L. Dontchev and R. T. Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, 2nd ed., Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3
6 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Theory for Solutions in Statistical Estimation and Stochastic Programming: Generalized M-Estimates Converge in Distribution to the Inverse Contingent Derivative at a GaussianResearch Paper

Motivation

Maximum likelihood estimates, least-squares fits and sample-average approximations of stochastic programs solve 0=fˉν(x)0 = \bar f^\nu(x)0=fˉ​ν(x), where fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν averages a random integrand over ν\nuν observations. Their classical asymptotic theory rests on the implicit function theorem and needs a smooth, unconstrained problem.

When the estimate is constrained to a set, for example a nonnegativity constraint, a simplex or a polyhedron, the first-order conditions become a generalized equation

0∈f(z,x)+N(x),0 \in f(z, x) + N(x),0∈f(z,x)+N(x),

where NNN is a multifunction such as the normal cone of the constraint set. The same form describes optimality conditions of stochastic programs and variational inequalities. Aitchison and Silvey (1958) treated equality-constrained maximum likelihood. Huber (1967) allowed nonsmooth estimating functions but required an open parameter domain. Dupačová and Wets (1988) and Shapiro (1989) derived limit laws for solutions of stochastic programs under smoothness of the expected gradient. King and Rockafellar (1993) gave a general theory that needs neither smoothness of the expected map nor single-valuedness of NNN: the limit law of the normalized error is the image of a Gaussian under a contingent derivative, a positively homogeneous and generally nonlinear map, so the limit is generally not normal.

Setting

Let ZZZ be a separable Banach space with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ be the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rm\mathbb R^mRm. A multifunction G:Z⇉RnG : Z \rightrightarrows \mathbb R^nG:Z⇉Rn assigns a set G(z)⊆RnG(z) \subseteq \mathbb R^nG(z)⊆Rn to each zzz. Its graph is gph⁡G\operatorname{gph} GgphG and its inverse is G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}G^{-1}(x) = \{z \mid x \in G(z)\}G−1(x)={z∣x∈G(z)}.

For sets AtA_tAt​ indexed by t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, the upper limit lim sup⁡At\limsup A_tlimsupAt​ consists of the points xxx with x=lim⁡xkx = \lim x_kx=limxk​, xk∈Atkx_k \in A_{t_k}xk​∈Atk​​ for some tk↓0t_k \downarrow 0tk​↓0, and the lower limit of the points reachable along every such sequence. The contingent derivative of GGG at (z,x)∈gph⁡G(z, x) \in \operatorname{gph} G(z,x)∈gphG is the multifunction DG(z∣x)DG(z|x)DG(z∣x) with

gph⁡DG(z∣x)=lim sup⁡t↓0t−1[gph⁡G−(z,x)].\operatorname{gph} DG(z|x) = \limsup_{t \downarrow 0} t^{-1}\big[\operatorname{gph} G - (z,x)\big].gphDG(z∣x)=t↓0limsup​t−1[gphG−(z,x)].

GGG is proto-differentiable when this upper limit equals the lower limit, and semi-differentiable when t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w)t^{-1}[G(z + t w') - x] \to DG(z|x)(w)t−1[G(z+tw′)−x]→DG(z∣x)(w) as t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 and w′→ww' \to ww′→w. A single-valued ggg is B-differentiable at zzz when t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w)t^{-1}[g(z + tw') - g(z)] \to Dg(z)(w)t−1[g(z+tw′)−g(z)]→Dg(z)(w) in the same sense.

The deterministic problem is 0∈f(z,x)+N(x)0 \in f(z, x) + N(x)0∈f(z,x)+N(x) with f:Z×Rn→Rmf : Z \times \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mf:Z×Rn→Rm, data zzz and solution map J(z)J(z)J(z). At a reference pair (z∗,x∗)(z^*, x^*)(z∗,x∗) set F=f(z∗,⋅)+NF = f(z^*, \cdot) + NF=f(z∗,⋅)+N. The analytical assumptions M.1–M.4 are as follows. fff is jointly continuous and B-differentiable in each variable, with the zzz-derivative Dzf(z∗,x∗)D_z f(z^*, x^*)Dz​f(z∗,x∗) strong (uniform in xxx near x∗x^*x∗). NNN is closed and proto-differentiable. FFF is subinvertible: 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗), and a closed-graph, convex-valued selection of F−1F^{-1}F−1 near 000 passes through x∗x^*x∗. The contingent derivative DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is at most single-valued.

The statistical problem has i.i.d. random elements s1,s2,…s_1, s_2, \dotss1​,s2​,… of a measurable space SSS and an integrand f:U×S→Rmf : U \times S \to \mathbb R^mf:U×S→Rm on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗. It satisfies the probabilistic assumptions P.1–P.4: continuity in xxx, measurability in sss, a finite second moment at one point, and a Lipschitz bound ∣f(x1,s)−f(x2,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1−x2∣|f(x_1,s) - f(x_2,s)| \le a(s)|x_1 - x_2|∣f(x1​,s)−f(x2​,s)∣≤a(s)∣x1​−x2​∣ with Ea(s1)2<∞E a(s_1)^2 < \inftyEa(s1​)2<∞. The M-estimate xνx^\nuxν is a measurable solution of

0∈fˉν(x)+N(x),fˉν(x)=1ν∑i=1νf(x,si),0 \in \bar f^\nu(x) + N(x), \qquad \bar f^\nu(x) = \frac1\nu\sum_{i=1}^\nu f(x, s_i),0∈fˉ​ν(x)+N(x),fˉ​ν(x)=ν1​i=1∑ν​f(x,si​),

and the true equation is 0∈Ef(x)+N(x)0 \in Ef(x) + N(x)0∈Ef(x)+N(x) with F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.7 (asymptotic distribution of M-estimates)

Under P.1–P.4 on a compact neighborhood UUU of x∗x^*x∗, B-differentiability of EfEfEf at x∗x^*x∗, and M.2–M.4 for F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N, every sequence of measurable solutions xνx^\nuxν of (2.5) with xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely satisfies

ν [xν−x∗]→ D DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,cov⁡f(x∗,s1)).\sqrt\nu\,[x^\nu - x^*] \xrightarrow{\ \mathcal D\ } DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-w^*), \qquad w^* \sim \mathcal N\big(0, \operatorname{cov} f(x^*, s_1)\big).ν​[xν−x∗] D ​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−w∗),w∗∼N(0,covf(x∗,s1​)).

The goal fixes the limit law completely: the map is the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1, and the Gaussian has the covariance of the integrand at x∗x^*x∗.

Milestones

  • Theorem 2.4 gives bounds in probability, P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}P\{|x^\nu - x^*| > \delta\} \le P\{\alpha\lambda\|z^\nu - z^*\| > \delta\}P{∣xν−x∗∣>δ}≤P{αλ∥zν−z∗∥>δ}. Its proof uses the upper-Lipschitz property U∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣BU \cap F^{-1}(y) \subseteq x^* + \lambda|y|BU∩F−1(y)⊆x∗+λ∣y∣B (a display of the proof).
  • Theorem 2.6 is the abstract limit theorem: if τν−1[zν−z∗]→Dw\tau_\nu^{-1}[z^\nu - z^*] \to_{\mathcal D} wτν−1​[zν−z∗]→D​w, then τν−1[xν−x∗]→DDF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))\tau_\nu^{-1}[x^\nu - x^*] \to_{\mathcal D} DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))τν−1​[xν−x∗]→D​DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)). Its proof uses two displays: semi-differentiability of the localized solution map, with DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dzf(z∗,x∗)(w))DJ(z^*|x^*)(w) = DF^{-1}(0|x^*)(-D_z f(z^*,x^*)(w))DJ(z∗∣x∗)(w)=DF−1(0∣x∗)(−Dz​f(z∗,x∗)(w)), and a Lipschitz bound ∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥|x - x^*| \le \lambda\|z - z^*\|∣x−x∗∣≤λ∥z−z∗∥ on U∩J(z)U \cap J(z)U∩J(z).
  • Proposition A1, Corollary A2 and Theorem A3 concern the space Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U) under P.1–P.4. The integrand and the empirical means are random elements of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), and ν(fˉν−Ef)\sqrt\nu(\bar f^\nu - Ef)ν​(fˉ​ν−Ef) converges in distribution to a Gaussian element of Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U).

The three displays (Theorem 2.4's upper-Lipschitz inclusion, and Theorem 2.6's semi-differentiability and Lipschitz bound) are statements the paper cites from King and Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations ([12]: Proposition 2.1, Theorem 4.1, Remark 4.3). They are cited results, not this paper's own, and are milestones because the proofs of Theorems 2.4 and 2.6 rest on them.

Significance

Theorem 2.7 gives the limit law of constrained and nonsmooth M-estimates in a form that can be computed. When NNN is the normal cone of a polyhedron, DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is piecewise linear, and the limit is the solution of a random linear complementarity or quadratic problem driven by a Gaussian vector. This underlies the asymptotic theory of sample-average approximation in stochastic programming, where the paper applies it to stochastic programs (§3) and to piecewise linear-quadratic tracking problems (§4). Theorem 2.6 separates the deterministic sensitivity analysis from the probability, so any data sequence with a known limit law yields a limit law for the solutions.

The result is proved in the paper modulo the cited theorems of [12] and [11], but none of it is machine-checked. Mathlib has the real-valued i.i.d. central limit theorem, Gaussian measures on Banach spaces and convergence in distribution. It has no multivariate or Banach-space central limit theorem, no contingent derivatives and no set-valued implicit function theorem. Formalizing the mission produces these, along with a checked version of the cited sensitivity results.

Difficulty

The classical argument linearizes FFF at x∗x^*x∗, inverts the Jacobian and applies the delta method. Here FFF is set-valued and its derivative is only positively homogeneous. There is no Jacobian to invert, and the solution map need not be differentiable or even single-valued away from x∗x^*x∗. The replacement for the implicit function theorem is the semi-differentiability of the localized solution map under M.1–M.4. Proving it means controlling both the upper and the lower set limits of difference quotients of solution sets, and subinvertibility is what supplies existence of nearby solutions.

The probabilistic side cannot work coordinate by coordinate either. The estimate solves an equation in the whole function fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν, so convergence of fˉν\bar f^\nufˉ​ν at finitely many points is not enough. The central limit theorem must hold in the sup norm on Cm(U)C_m(U)Cm​(U), which requires tightness of the empirical process, and only then can the deterministic sensitivity result be composed with it.

Formalization scope

Points live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), and ZZZ is a real normed space with [CompleteSpace Z] [SeparableSpace Z] where the paper says "separable Banach". Set limits are Kuratowski limits along filters (t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 is 𝓝[>] 0, and (t,w′)→(0+,w)(t,w') \to (0^+,w)(t,w′)→(0+,w) is the product filter). The contingent derivative is defined by (2.2) alone. M.4's printed sum formula equals it under M.1, and this is not assumed. "B-differentiable" is read as the limit (2.4). Products carry Lean's max norm. s1s_1s1​ is s 0, empirical means sum over Finset.range ν, and (2.5) is required for ν≥1\nu \ge 1ν≥1. F=Ef+NF = Ef + NF=Ef+N is empty off UUU. Convergence in distribution is Mathlib's TendstoInDistribution, with the limit on its own probability space. The law of w∗w^*w∗ is fixed through linear functionals: ⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⁡⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1)⟩)\langle\ell, w^*\rangle \sim \mathcal N(0, \operatorname{Var}\langle\ell, f(x^*,s_1)\rangle)⟨ℓ,w∗⟩∼N(0,Var⟨ℓ,f(x∗,s1​)⟩). In Appendix A1–A3 the integrand is S → C(↥U, Rn m) with the Borel σ-algebra, and "Gaussian" is IsGaussian.

Explicit choices relative to the printed text:

  1. The paper states that an almost surely convergent sequence of solutions "converges to the point x∗x^*x∗" (Theorems 2.6 and 2.7). This is false when the true equation has a second solution: f(z,x)=x2−x−zf(z,x) = x^2 - x - zf(z,x)=x2−x−z, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}, z∗=x∗=0z^* = x^* = 0z∗=x∗=0 satisfies M.1–M.4 with J(0)={0,1}J(0) = \{0, 1\}J(0)={0,1}. The formalization assumes xν→x∗x^\nu \to x^*xν→x∗ almost surely instead.
  2. 0∈F(x∗)0 \in F(x^*)0∈F(x∗) (presupposed by DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗)) is explicit in Theorem 2.4 and the upper-Lipschitz display.
  3. The threshold for "all sufficiently small δ\deltaδ" in Theorem 2.4 is chosen with UUU and λ\lambdaλ, before the random elements.
  4. Proposition A1 and Corollary A2 carry P.1–P.4, as stated or inherited on the Appendix page, though their measurability conclusions use only P.1.
  5. In the limit theorems, the single-valued map DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) is a function LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative at every point.

The conclusion of the goal names its limit: the image of the stated Gaussian under a map LLL whose values lie in the contingent derivative of F−1F^{-1}F−1. A statement asserting only that ν(xν−x∗)\sqrt\nu(x^\nu - x^*)ν​(xν−x∗) converges in distribution to some limit, or replacing DF−1(0∣x∗)DF^{-1}(0|x^*)DF−1(0∣x∗) by a linear map, is a different and weaker theorem. A sorry-free check confirms that the goal's hypotheses can all be met (a degenerate instance with f(x,s)=xf(x,s) = xf(x,s)=x, N≡{0}N \equiv \{0\}N≡{0}).

A complete development needs Kuratowski set convergence and contingent derivatives (reusable across set-valued analysis), a central limit theorem in C(K)C(K)C(K) for Lipschitz-indexed processes (reusable for empirical-process theory), and a continuous-mapping argument for random closed sets. Contributions to any of these layers are welcome, as are proofs of the cited [12] statements.

Selected references

  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Asymptotic theory for solutions in statistical estimation and stochastic programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1) (1993). https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.1.148
  • A. J. King and R. T. Rockafellar, Sensitivity analysis for nonsmooth generalized equations, Mathematical Programming 55 (1992) 193–212. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581199
  • A. J. King, Generalized delta theorems for multivalued mappings and measurable selections, Mathematics of Operations Research 14(4) (1989) 720–736. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.14.4.720
  • J. Dupačová and R. J.-B. Wets, Asymptotic behavior of statistical estimators and of optimal solutions of stochastic optimization problems, Annals of Statistics 16(4) (1988) 1517–1549. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176351052
  • A. Shapiro, Asymptotic properties of statistical estimators in stochastic programming, Annals of Statistics 17(2) (1989) 841–858. https://doi.org/10.1214/aos/1176347146
  • P. J. Huber, The behavior of maximum likelihood estimates under nonstandard conditions, Proc. Fifth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 1 (1967) 221–233. https://projecteuclid.org/euclid.bsmsp/1200512988
  • A. Araujo and E. Giné, The Central Limit Theorem for Real and Banach Valued Random Variables, Wiley, 1980.
10 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStatisticsStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Estimation of the Maximum of a Regression Function: The Kiefer–Wolfowitz Iterates z_n Converge in Probability to the Maximizer θResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in statistics, engineering and operations research ask for the input level xxx at which an unknown response function is largest, when the response can only be measured with noise: the dose that maximizes a yield, the setting that maximizes throughput in a simulation, the parameter that maximizes an expected reward. Robbins and Monro (1951) had shown how to find, by sequential noisy measurements, the root of an unknown increasing function. Kiefer and Wolfowitz (1952) adapted the idea to maximization: at each step, measure the response at two points zn±cnz_n\pm c_nzn​±cn​ placed symmetrically about the current estimate, and move the estimate in the direction of the observed difference. Their scheme is the origin of finite-difference stochastic approximation, the gradient-free ancestor of simultaneous-perturbation and zeroth-order methods in simulation optimization and machine learning.

Timeline. 1951: Robbins and Monro, root finding, convergence in mean square. 1952: Wolfowitz, convergence in probability for Robbins–Monro under weaker conditions; Kiefer and Wolfowitz, the present paper, convergence in probability of the maximization scheme. 1954: Blum proved almost-sure convergence of both schemes under related conditions (doi:10.1214/aoms/1177728794). Later work (Spall 1992, among many) extended the finite-difference idea to many dimensions.

Setting

For each level x∈Rx\in\mathbb Rx∈R, an observation taken at xxx is a random number with distribution H(⋅∣x)H(\cdot\mid x)H(⋅∣x); the family depends measurably on xxx. The regression function is the mean observation,

M(x)=∫−∞∞y dH(y∣x),M(x)=\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}y\,dH(y\mid x),M(x)=∫−∞∞​ydH(y∣x),

and the observations have uniformly bounded variance: ∫(y−M(x))2 dH(y∣x)≤S\int (y-M(x))^2\,dH(y\mid x)\le S∫(y−M(x))2dH(y∣x)≤S for all xxx. The function MMM is unimodal about an unknown point θ\thetaθ: strictly increasing for x<θx<\thetax<θ and strictly decreasing for x>θx>\thetax>θ.

Two sequences of positive numbers ana_nan​ (step sizes) and cnc_ncn​ (probe widths) satisfy

cn→0,∑an=∞,∑ancn<∞,∑an2cn−2<∞,c_n\to0,\qquad \sum a_n=\infty,\qquad \sum a_nc_n<\infty,\qquad \sum a_n^2c_n^{-2}<\infty,cn​→0,∑an​=∞,∑an​cn​<∞,∑an2​cn−2​<∞,

for example an=n−1a_n=n^{-1}an​=n−1, cn=n−1/3c_n=n^{-1/3}cn​=n−1/3. Starting from an arbitrary number z1z_1z1​, the Kiefer–Wolfowitz process is

zn+1=zn+an y2n−y2n−1cn,z_{n+1}=z_n+a_n\,\frac{y_{2n}-y_{2n-1}}{c_n},zn+1​=zn​+an​cn​y2n​−y2n−1​​,

where, given everything observed so far, y2n−1y_{2n-1}y2n−1​ and y2ny_{2n}y2n​ are independent with laws H(⋅∣zn−cn)H(\cdot\mid z_n-c_n)H(⋅∣zn​−cn​) and H(⋅∣zn+cn)H(\cdot\mid z_n+c_n)H(⋅∣zn​+cn​).

The paper imposes three regularity conditions on MMM:

  1. Condition 1 (Lipschitz near θ\thetaθ): for some β,B>0\beta,B>0β,B>0, ∣x′−θ∣+∣x′′−θ∣<β|x'-\theta|+|x''-\theta|<\beta∣x′−θ∣+∣x′′−θ∣<β and x′≠x′′x'\neq x''x′=x′′ imply ∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<B∣x′−x′′∣|M(x')-M(x'')|<B|x'-x''|∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<B∣x′−x′′∣.
  2. Condition 2 (bounded oscillation): for some ρ,R>0\rho,R>0ρ,R>0, ∣x′−x′′∣<ρ|x'-x''|<\rho∣x′−x′′∣<ρ implies ∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<R|M(x')-M(x'')|<R∣M(x′)−M(x′′)∣<R.
  3. Condition 3 (no flat regions away from θ\thetaθ): for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 there is π(δ)>0\pi(\delta)>0π(δ)>0 such that ∣z−θ∣>δ|z-\theta|>\delta∣z−θ∣>δ implies ∣M(z+ε)−M(z−ε)∣/ε>π(δ)|M(z+\varepsilon)-M(z-\varepsilon)|/\varepsilon>\pi(\delta)∣M(z+ε)−M(z−ε)∣/ε>π(δ) for all 0<ε<δ/20<\varepsilon<\delta/20<ε<δ/2.

In the Lean development these objects are regFun H (MMM), SecondMomentBound H S, Unimodal, Cond1, Cond2, Cond3, StepSizes a c and the structure IsKWProcess, all in the namespace KieferWolfowitz.Convergence.

Formalization targets

Goal: convergence in probability

for every η>0,P{∣zn−θ∣>η}⟶0(n→∞).\text{for every }\eta>0,\qquad P\{|z_n-\theta|>\eta\}\longrightarrow 0\quad(n\to\infty).for every η>0,P{∣zn​−θ∣>η}⟶0(n→∞).

This is the theorem of the paper (stated on p. 462, proved in §3 in the form (3.22)). It fixes no rate and no constants, so it is the stable form of the result.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (3.6) The one-step identity for bn=E(zn−θ)2b_n=E(z_n-\theta)^2bn​=E(zn​−θ)2: bn+1=bn+2ancnE Un(zn)+an2cn2E(y2n−y2n−1)2b_{n+1}=b_n+2\frac{a_n}{c_n}E\,U_n(z_n)+\frac{a_n^2}{c_n^2}E(y_{2n}-y_{2n-1})^2bn+1​=bn​+2cn​an​​EUn​(zn​)+cn2​an2​​E(y2n​−y2n−1​)2, with Un(z)=(z−θ)(M(z+cn)−M(z−cn))U_n(z)=(z-\theta)(M(z+c_n)-M(z-c_n))Un​(z)=(z−θ)(M(z+cn​)−M(z−cn​)).
  2. (3.8) 0≤Un+(z)<2Bcn20\le U_n^+(z)<2Bc_n^20≤Un+​(z)<2Bcn2​ whenever cn<12βc_n<\frac12\betacn​<21​β.
  3. (3.11)–(3.12) E{(y2n−y2n−1)2∣zn}≤2S+R2E\{(y_{2n}-y_{2n-1})^2\mid z_n\}\le 2S+R^2E{(y2n​−y2n−1​)2∣zn​}≤2S+R2 whenever cn<ρ/2c_n<\rho/2cn​<ρ/2.
  4. (3.15) ∑(an/cn)Nn\sum (a_n/c_n)N_n∑(an​/cn​)Nn​ converges, where Nn=E Un−(zn)N_n=E\,U_n^-(z_n)Nn​=EUn−​(zn​).
  5. (3.18) lim inf⁡nE{Kn∣zn−θ∣}=0\liminf_n E\{K_n|z_n-\theta|\}=0liminfn​E{Kn​∣zn​−θ∣}=0, with Kn=∣(M(zn+cn)−M(zn−cn))/cn∣K_n=|(M(z_n+c_n)-M(z_n-c_n))/c_n|Kn​=∣(M(zn​+cn​)−M(zn​−cn​))/cn​∣.
  6. After (3.19) Along any n1<n2<⋯n_1<n_2<\cdotsn1​<n2​<⋯ with E{Knj∣znj−θ∣}→0E\{K_{n_j}|z_{n_j}-\theta|\}\to0E{Knj​​∣znj​​−θ∣}→0, znj→θz_{n_j}\to\thetaznj​​→θ in probability.
  7. (3.28) If N0N_0N0​ satisfies (3.25)–(3.27) for s>0s>0s>0, then E{(zn−θ)2∣zN0}<(zN0−θ)2+sE\{(z_n-\theta)^2\mid z_{N_0}\}<(z_{N_0}-\theta)^2+sE{(zn​−θ)2∣zN0​​}<(zN0​​−θ)2+s for all n>N0n>N_0n>N0​.

Significance

The result shows that the maximizer of a function observable only through noise can be located consistently using function evaluations alone, without gradients and without a parametric model of MMM. The conditions are qualitative: no differentiability, no specific noise distribution, and the noise may change shape with xxx. This is the template for gradient-free stochastic optimization: simulation optimization with finite-difference gradient estimates, simultaneous-perturbation methods, and zeroth-order methods in learning are all analysed by refining the same bias–variance balance between the probe width cnc_ncn​ and the step ana_nan​.

The theorem has been proved since 1952 and is not open. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of it exists. A formalization produces a checked proof of a founding result of stochastic approximation and, along the way, the probabilistic infrastructure such proofs share: processes defined through conditional laws given a filtration, recursions for second moments, conditional Chebyshev arguments, and the passage from subsequence convergence to full convergence by a restart bound. Alternative proofs (via supermartingale convergence, which would give almost-sure convergence under stronger hypotheses) are welcome as separate developments but are not the goal.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to show that E(zn−θ)2E(z_n-\theta)^2E(zn​−θ)2 decreases. It does not: the drift term 2ancnE Un(zn)2\frac{a_n}{c_n}E\,U_n(z_n)2cn​an​​EUn​(zn​) is negative only on average and only once the probes straddle θ\thetaθ correctly, while the noise term an2cn2en\frac{a_n^2}{c_n^2}e_ncn2​an2​​en​ is always positive and the finite-difference estimate of the slope has a bias of order cnc_ncn​. A one-step contraction is therefore unavailable, and summability arguments alone give smallness only along a subsequence; turning that into convergence of the whole sequence is where the difficulty lies, and it is also where Condition 3, which forbids flat stretches of MMM away from θ\thetaθ, cannot be dispensed with. The argument needs integrability of quantities the paper treats as finite without comment, and the conditional statements require the conditional law of the observation pair, not just its unconditional moments.

Formalization scope

  • Observations. HHH is a Markov kernel Kernel ℝ ℝ. Every H(⋅∣x)H(\cdot\mid x)H(⋅∣x) has ∫y2 dH<∞\int y^2\,dH<\infty∫y2dH<∞, so MMM and the variance in (2.2) are genuine integrals.
  • The process. On a probability space with a filtration (Fn)(\mathcal F_n)(Fn​), znz_nzn​ is Fn\mathcal F_nFn​-measurable, the pair (y2n−1,y2n)(y_{2n-1},y_{2n})(y2n−1​,y2n​) is Fn+1\mathcal F_{n+1}Fn+1​-measurable, and P(y2n−1∈A,y2n∈B∣Fn)=H(A∣zn−cn)H(B∣zn+cn)P(y_{2n-1}\in A, y_{2n}\in B\mid\mathcal F_n)=H(A\mid z_n-c_n)H(B\mid z_n+c_n)P(y2n−1​∈A,y2n​∈B∣Fn​)=H(A∣zn​−cn​)H(B∣zn​+cn​) a.s. for all Borel A,BA,BA,B. This is the reading of "independent chance variables with respective distributions H(y∣zn−cn)H(y\mid z_n-c_n)H(y∣zn​−cn​) and H(y∣zn+cn)H(y\mid z_n+c_n)H(y∣zn​+cn​)". The starting point z1z_1z1​ is a deterministic number.
  • Indices are 0-based: Lean's z 0 is z1z_1z1​, a n, c n are an+1a_{n+1}an+1​, cn+1c_{n+1}cn+1​.
  • Condition 1 as printed has a strict inequality that fails at x′=x′′x'=x''x′=x′′, which makes it unsatisfiable; the formalization adds x′≠x′′x'\neq x''x′=x′′. Condition 3's infimum over 12δ>ε>0\frac12\delta>\varepsilon>021​δ>ε>0 is stated pointwise, which is equivalent since π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) is existential, with π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) uniform in zzz.
  • Explicit readings of loose phrases. "For nnn sufficiently large" in (3.10)–(3.12) is the hypothesis cn<ρ/2c_n<\rho/2cn​<ρ/2; conditioning "on znz_nzn​" or "on zN0=zz_{N_0}=zzN0​​=z" is conditioning on Fn\mathcal F_nFn​ or FN0\mathcal F_{N_0}FN0​​; "converges stochastically" is Mathlib's TendstoInMeasure; "lim inf⁡=0\liminf=0liminf=0" for a nonnegative sequence is "below every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 infinitely often".
  • Integrability of every expectation in a milestone is either a hypothesis or part of the conclusion, so no statement holds by Lean's convention that the integral of a non-integrable function is 000.
  • Ruled out. A formalization in which the observations are arbitrary random variables not tied to HHH, in which ∑an=∞\sum a_n=\infty∑an​=∞ is dropped, or in which π(δ)\pi(\delta)π(δ) may depend on zzz, would make the goal false or a different theorem; the hypotheses here are jointly satisfiable (checked for H(⋅∣x)=δ−∣x∣H(\cdot\mid x)=\delta_{-|x|}H(⋅∣x)=δ−∣x∣​, θ=0\theta=0θ=0, an=n−1a_n=n^{-1}an​=n−1, cn=n−1/3c_n=n^{-1/3}cn​=n−1/3).
  • Not formalized. The remark on p. 463 that truncating zn±cnz_n\pm c_nzn​±cn​ to an interval [C1,C2][C_1,C_2][C1​,C2​] preserves the conclusion (asserted without proof), the motivational discussion (a)–(c), and §4's further problems.
  • Distinct from the Kiefer–Wolfowitz equivalence theorem of optimal experimental design (1960), which is already on the platform under BanditAlgorithm.kiefer_wolfowitz_equivalence; the two results share authors and nothing else.

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: conditional expectations of functions of a pair with a given conditional law, tail-sum bounds, and the passage from a restart bound plus subsequence convergence in probability to full convergence. Contributions of any milestone, of intermediate lemmas such as (3.7), (3.9), (3.13) and (3.29), and of the final assembly are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Kiefer and J. Wolfowitz, Stochastic estimation of the maximum of a regression function, Ann. Math. Statist. 23 (1952), 462–466. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729392
  • H. Robbins and S. Monro, A stochastic approximation method, Ann. Math. Statist. 22 (1951), 400–407. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729586
  • J. Wolfowitz, On the stochastic approximation method of Robbins and Monro, Ann. Math. Statist. 23 (1952), 457–461. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177729391
  • J. R. Blum, Approximation methods which converge with probability one, Ann. Math. Statist. 25 (1954), 382–386. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177728794
  • J. C. Spall, Multivariate stochastic approximation using a simultaneous perturbation gradient approximation, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 37 (1992), 332–341. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.119632
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

The Fritz John Necessary Optimality Conditions in the Presence of Equality and Inequality Constraints: Every Minimizer of a C¹ Program Admits Multipliers (ū₀, ū, v̄) ≠ 0 with ū ≥ 0Research Paper

Motivation

For problems with inequality constraints only, F. John (1948) showed that every minimizer admits nonnegative multipliers (uˉ0,uˉ1,…,uˉm)≠0(\bar u_0, \bar u_1, \dots, \bar u_m) \ne 0(uˉ0​,uˉ1​,…,uˉm​)=0, one of which belongs to the objective. The Kuhn–Tucker conditions (1951) are the stronger statement in which the objective's multiplier can be taken equal to one; they need a constraint qualification.

Problems arising in practice mix equalities and inequalities. Fritz John's theorem does not cover them, and the obvious reduction, writing each equality hj(x)=0h_j(x) = 0hj​(x)=0 as the two inequalities hj(x)≤0h_j(x) \le 0hj​(x)≤0 and −hj(x)≤0-h_j(x) \le 0−hj​(x)≤0, destroys the content of the conditions: every feasible point then satisfies them with uˉ0=0\bar u_0 = 0uˉ0​=0. O. L. Mangasarian and S. Fromovitz (1967) proved a version of Fritz John's conditions that treats equalities directly and stays informative, and from it derived the constraint qualification now known as the Mangasarian–Fromovitz constraint qualification (MFCQ). MFCQ is the standard regularity assumption in the convergence theory of sequential quadratic programming, interior-point and augmented-Lagrangian methods, and in the stability theory of parametric programs.

Timeline.

  • 1939, W. Karush (master's thesis) and 1951, H. W. Kuhn and A. W. Tucker: multiplier conditions with uˉ0=1\bar u_0 = 1uˉ0​=1 for inequality constraints, under a constraint qualification.
  • 1948, F. John: the multiplier rule with uˉ0≥0\bar u_0 \ge 0uˉ0​≥0 for inequality constraints, no qualification needed.
  • 1967, Mangasarian and Fromovitz (this paper): the multiplier rule for equalities and inequalities together, and the qualification (3.4)–(3.6).

Setting

Let EnE^nEn be nnn-dimensional Euclidean space, and let θ,g1,…,gm,h1,…,hk:En→R\theta, g_1, \dots, g_m, h_1, \dots, h_k : E^n \to \mathbb Rθ,g1​,…,gm​,h1​,…,hk​:En→R be functions with continuous first partial derivatives on EnE^nEn. The program is

minimize θ(x)subject togi(x)≤0, i∈M={1,…,m},hj(x)=0, j∈K={1,…,k}.(1.1)\text{minimize } \theta(x) \quad \text{subject to} \quad g_i(x) \le 0,\ i \in M = \{1,\dots,m\}, \qquad h_j(x) = 0,\ j \in K = \{1,\dots,k\}. \tag{1.1}minimize θ(x)subject togi​(x)≤0, i∈M={1,…,m},hj​(x)=0, j∈K={1,…,k}.(1.1)

The feasible set is S={x∈En:gi(x)≤0, i∈M, hj(x)=0, j∈K}S = \{x \in E^n : g_i(x) \le 0,\ i \in M,\ h_j(x) = 0,\ j \in K\}S={x∈En:gi​(x)≤0, i∈M, hj​(x)=0, j∈K}. A point xˉ\bar xxˉ is a solution of (1.1) if xˉ∈S\bar x \in Sxˉ∈S and θ(xˉ)≤θ(x)\theta(\bar x) \le \theta(x)θ(xˉ)≤θ(x) for all x∈Sx \in Sx∈S. The active set at xˉ\bar xxˉ is Mˉ={i∈M:gi(xˉ)=0}\bar M = \{i \in M : g_i(\bar x) = 0\}Mˉ={i∈M:gi​(xˉ)=0}. The gradient of fff at xˉ\bar xxˉ is ∇f(xˉ)\nabla f(\bar x)∇f(xˉ), and y′zy'zy′z denotes the inner product.

The generalized Fritz John conditions hold at xˉ\bar xxˉ if there are uˉ=(uˉ0,uˉ1,…,uˉm)\bar u = (\bar u_0, \bar u_1, \dots, \bar u_m)uˉ=(uˉ0​,uˉ1​,…,uˉm​) and vˉ=(vˉ1,…,vˉk)\bar v = (\bar v_1, \dots, \bar v_k)vˉ=(vˉ1​,…,vˉk​) with

uˉ0∇θ(xˉ)+∑i=1muˉi∇gi(xˉ)+∑j=1kvˉj∇hj(xˉ)=0,∑i=1muˉigi(xˉ)=0,uˉ≥0,(uˉ,vˉ)≠0.\bar u_0 \nabla\theta(\bar x) + \sum_{i=1}^m \bar u_i \nabla g_i(\bar x) + \sum_{j=1}^k \bar v_j \nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0, \qquad \sum_{i=1}^m \bar u_i g_i(\bar x) = 0, \qquad \bar u \ge 0, \qquad (\bar u, \bar v) \ne 0 .uˉ0​∇θ(xˉ)+i=1∑m​uˉi​∇gi​(xˉ)+j=1∑k​vˉj​∇hj​(xˉ)=0,i=1∑m​uˉi​gi​(xˉ)=0,uˉ≥0,(uˉ,vˉ)=0.

The Kuhn–Tucker conditions are the same system with uˉ0=1\bar u_0 = 1uˉ0​=1 and no nontriviality requirement.

Formalization targets

Goal: the generalized Fritz John necessary conditions (p. 41)

If xˉ\bar xxˉ is a solution of (1.1), then there exist uˉ∈Em+1\bar u \in E^{m+1}uˉ∈Em+1 and vˉ∈Ek\bar v \in E^kvˉ∈Ek with

uˉ0∇θ(xˉ)+∑i=1muˉi∇gi(xˉ)+∑j=1kvˉj∇hj(xˉ)=0,∑i=1muˉigi(xˉ)=0,uˉ≥0,(uˉ,vˉ)≠0.(2.9–2.12)\bar u_0 \nabla\theta(\bar x) + \sum_{i=1}^m \bar u_i \nabla g_i(\bar x) + \sum_{j=1}^k \bar v_j \nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0, \quad \sum_{i=1}^m \bar u_i g_i(\bar x) = 0, \quad \bar u \ge 0, \quad (\bar u, \bar v) \ne 0. \tag{2.9–2.12}uˉ0​∇θ(xˉ)+i=1∑m​uˉi​∇gi​(xˉ)+j=1∑k​vˉj​∇hj​(xˉ)=0,i=1∑m​uˉi​gi​(xˉ)=0,uˉ≥0,(uˉ,vˉ)=0.(2.9–2.12)

No regularity of the constraints is assumed. The nontriviality requirement covers uˉ0\bar u_0uˉ0​, the uˉi\bar u_iuˉi​ and the vˉj\bar v_jvˉj​ together.

Milestones

  1. Motzkin's transposition theorem (p. 39): for real matrices A,B,CA, B, CA,B,C with AAA nonempty, exactly one of y′A<0, y′B≤0, y′C=0y'A < 0,\ y'B \le 0,\ y'C = 0y′A<0, y′B≤0, y′C=0 and Az1+Bz2+Cz3=0, z1≥0, z1≠0, z2≥0Az_1 + Bz_2 + Cz_3 = 0,\ z_1 \ge 0,\ z_1 \ne 0,\ z_2 \ge 0Az1​+Bz2​+Cz3​=0, z1​≥0, z1​=0, z2​≥0 is solvable.
  2. Lemma 1 (pp. 39–40): if fi(xˉ)=0f_i(\bar x) = 0fi​(xˉ)=0, hj(xˉ)=0h_j(\bar x) = 0hj​(xˉ)=0 at some xˉ\bar xxˉ in an open set DDD, no x∈Dx \in Dx∈D has fi(x)<0f_i(x) < 0fi​(x)<0 for all iii and hj(x)=0h_j(x) = 0hj​(x)=0 for all jjj, and the ∇hj(xˉ)\nabla h_j(\bar x)∇hj​(xˉ) are linearly independent, then no yyy has y′∇fi(xˉ)<0y'\nabla f_i(\bar x) < 0y′∇fi​(xˉ)<0 and y′∇hj(xˉ)=0y'\nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0y′∇hj​(xˉ)=0.
  3. Lemma 2 (p. 40): under the same assumptions, without independence, there are rˉ≥0\bar r \ge 0rˉ≥0 and sˉ\bar ssˉ, not both zero, with ∑rˉi∇fi(xˉ)+∑sˉj∇hj(xˉ)=0\sum \bar r_i \nabla f_i(\bar x) + \sum \bar s_j \nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0∑rˉi​∇fi​(xˉ)+∑sˉj​∇hj​(xˉ)=0.
  4. DDD is open (p. 41): D={x:gi(x)<0, i∈M∖Mˉ}D = \{x : g_i(x) < 0,\ i \in M \setminus \bar M\}D={x:gi​(x)<0, i∈M∖Mˉ} is open.
  5. The reduction (pp. 41–42): at a solution xˉ\bar xxˉ of (1.1), xˉ∈D\bar x \in Dxˉ∈D and the system θ(x)−θ(xˉ)<0\theta(x) - \theta(\bar x) < 0θ(x)−θ(xˉ)<0, gi(x)<0g_i(x) < 0gi​(x)<0 (i∈Mˉi \in \bar Mi∈Mˉ), hj(x)=0h_j(x) = 0hj​(x)=0 has no solution in DDD.

Companion results

  • Corollary (p. 43): the generalized Fritz John conditions hold at any feasible point satisfying (2.27) or (2.28).
  • The generalized constraint qualification (pp. 43–44): at a solution, yˉ′∇gi(xˉ)<0\bar y'\nabla g_i(\bar x) < 0yˉ​′∇gi​(xˉ)<0 (i∈Mˉi \in \bar Mi∈Mˉ), yˉ′∇hj(xˉ)=0\bar y'\nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0yˉ​′∇hj​(xˉ)=0 and independent ∇hj(xˉ)\nabla h_j(\bar x)∇hj​(xˉ) imply the Kuhn–Tucker conditions.
  • The splitting remark (p. 38): after splitting equalities, every feasible point satisfies Fritz John's original conditions.

Significance

The theorem is a multiplier rule for smooth programs with both kinds of constraints and no assumption on the constraints. It has two direct consequences in the paper. First, it yields MFCQ, the condition (3.4)–(3.6) under which the Kuhn–Tucker conditions hold at every solution. MFCQ is weaker than linear independence of all active gradients (LICQ), and it is equivalent to boundedness of the Kuhn–Tucker multiplier set (Gauvin, 1977). Second, the corollary identifies feasible non-minimizers at which the conditions hold anyway.

The result is classical and its proof is in every nonlinear-programming textbook. Mathlib has the equality-constrained Lagrange multiplier rule for a local extremum (IsLocalExtrOn.exists_multipliers_of_hasStrictFDerivAt) and the implicit function theorem, and Prove2Me has a formalized Fritz John theorem for inequality constraints only. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of the mixed equality–inequality Fritz John rule, of MFCQ, or of Motzkin's transposition theorem in this form exists. The formalization would provide the standard multiplier rule and qualification on which a formal theory of nonlinear programming builds.

Difficulty

With inequalities alone, John's theorem follows from the observation that if xˉ\bar xxˉ is a minimizer, no direction yyy strictly decreases θ\thetaθ and every active gig_igi​ to first order; Motzkin's (or Gordan's) theorem then produces the multipliers. With equalities the first step fails: a direction with y′∇hj(xˉ)=0y'\nabla h_j(\bar x) = 0y′∇hj​(xˉ)=0 is tangent to the equality manifold but generally leaves it, so a first-order descent direction does not yield a feasible point with smaller objective. Lemma 1 is precisely the claim that it does when the ∇hj(xˉ)\nabla h_j(\bar x)∇hj​(xˉ) are independent, and it needs a curve inside {h=0}\{h = 0\}{h=0} along which the strict inequalities persist: the implicit function theorem, applied on an open set, with care that the curve stays in DDD. The linearly dependent case must be handled separately, and it is the only place the multipliers vˉ\bar vvˉ can be nonzero with uˉ=0\bar u = 0uˉ=0.

Formalization scope

EnE^nEn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), the inner product y′zy'zy′z is inner ℝ y z, and ∇f(xˉ)\nabla f(\bar x)∇f(xˉ) is Mathlib's gradient f xbar. "Continuous first partial derivatives on EnE^nEn", the standing assumption of §1, is ContDiff ℝ 1 (equivalent in finite dimension) and is a hypothesis of the goal, the corollary and the constraint qualification; Lemma 1 and Lemma 2 use ContDiffOn ℝ 1 · D on an open set DDD, as on the page. Indices i∈Mi \in Mi∈M and j∈Kj \in Kj∈K are Fin m and Fin k, 0-based; m=0m = 0m=0 and k=0k = 0k=0 are allowed. The multiplier vector uˉ∈Em+1\bar u \in E^{m+1}uˉ∈Em+1 is split into u0 : ℝ and u : Fin m → ℝ, and (uˉ,vˉ)≠0(\bar u, \bar v) \ne 0(uˉ,vˉ)=0 is "u0 ≠ 0, or some u i ≠ 0, or some v j ≠ 0". A solution of (1.1) is a global minimizer over SSS, as the proof on p. 42 uses. In Motzkin's theorem a matrix is the family of its columns, and "either … or …, but never both" is Xor. In Lemma 2, "the assumptions of Lemma 1" exclude the proviso (2.5) of linear independence, which the proof of Lemma 2 treats separately.

The goal does not assume linear independence of the ∇hj(xˉ)\nabla h_j(\bar x)∇hj​(xˉ), does not mention DDD or Lemma 1, and requires (uˉ,vˉ)≠0(\bar u, \bar v) \ne 0(uˉ,vˉ)=0 with uˉ0\bar u_0uˉ0​ included; a formalization that drops uˉ0\bar u_0uˉ0​ from the nontriviality condition is false at m=k=0m = k = 0m=k=0, and one that requires uˉ0≠0\bar u_0 \ne 0uˉ0​=0 is the Kuhn–Tucker statement, false without a qualification.

A complete development needs Motzkin's (or Gordan's) theorem of the alternative, which is reusable well beyond this mission, and the implicit function theorem on open sets in Euclidean space with a C1C^1C1 curve argument. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as is a proof of the goal by another route.

Selected references

  • O. L. Mangasarian and S. Fromovitz, The Fritz John necessary optimality conditions in the presence of equality and inequality constraints, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 17 (1967), 37–47. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(67)90163-1
  • F. John, Extremum problems with inequalities as subsidiary conditions, in Studies and Essays Presented to R. Courant on his 60th Birthday, Interscience, New York, 1948, 187–204.
  • H. W. Kuhn and A. W. Tucker, Nonlinear programming, Proc. Second Berkeley Symposium on Mathematical Statistics and Probability, University of California Press, 1951, 481–492.
  • J. Gauvin, A necessary and sufficient regularity condition to have bounded multipliers in nonconvex programming, Math. Programming 12 (1977), 136–138. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01593777
  • O. L. Mangasarian, Nonlinear Programming, McGraw-Hill, 1969; reprinted SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 10, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971255
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Global Convergence Properties of Conjugate Gradient Methods for Optimization I: Conjugate Gradient Methods with |β_k| ≤ β_k^FR Are Globally Convergent under Strong Wolfe Line SearchesResearch Paper

Motivation

Nonlinear conjugate gradient methods minimize a smooth function fff of nnn variables using only function values, gradients and a few vectors of storage. They are the method of choice when nnn is so large that quasi-Newton matrices cannot be stored, and they remain a standard component of large-scale optimization software. Their convergence theory is delicate: the classical results assume exact line searches, while practical codes accept any steplength satisfying inexpensive inexact conditions.

Gilbert and Nocedal (INRIA RR-1268, 1990; journal version SIAM J. Optim. 2 (1992)) organized the global convergence theory of these methods around a single device and proved two families of results. This mission covers the first: every conjugate gradient method whose parameter βk\beta_kβk​ is bounded in absolute value by the Fletcher–Reeves value converges under the strong Wolfe line search.

Timeline. Fletcher and Reeves (1964) and Polak and Ribière (1969) introduced the two best-known choices of βk\beta_kβk​. Zoutendijk (1970) and Wolfe (1969, 1971) established the summability condition now called Zoutendijk's condition. Al-Baali (1985) proved that the Fletcher–Reeves method with the strong Wolfe line search and σ2<12\sigma_2 < \tfrac12σ2​<21​ generates descent directions and satisfies lim inf⁡∥gk∥=0\liminf\|g_k\| = 0liminf∥gk​∥=0. Touati-Ahmed and Storey (1990) treated nonnegative hybrids. Gilbert and Nocedal (1990) extended Al-Baali's theorem to every βk\beta_kβk​ with ∣βk∣≤βkFR|\beta_k| \le \beta_k^{FR}∣βk​∣≤βkFR​, which admits negative values and yields a convergent modification of the Polak–Ribière method.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real inner product space and f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R continuously differentiable, with gradient g=∇fg = \nabla fg=∇f for that inner product. Starting from x1x_1x1​, the method generates

d1=−g1,dk=−gk+βkdk−1 (k≥2),xk+1=xk+αkdk,d_1 = -g_1,\qquad d_k = -g_k + \beta_k d_{k-1}\ (k\ge 2),\qquad x_{k+1} = x_k + \alpha_k d_k,d1​=−g1​,dk​=−gk​+βk​dk−1​ (k≥2),xk+1​=xk​+αk​dk​,

where gk=g(xk)g_k = g(x_k)gk​=g(xk​), βk\beta_kβk​ is a scalar and αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 a steplength found by a one-dimensional search. The Fletcher–Reeves and Polak–Ribière scalars are

βkFR=∥gk∥2∥gk−1∥2,βkPR=⟨gk,gk−gk−1⟩∥gk−1∥2.\beta_k^{FR} = \frac{\|g_k\|^2}{\|g_{k-1}\|^2},\qquad \beta_k^{PR} = \frac{\langle g_k, g_k - g_{k-1}\rangle}{\|g_{k-1}\|^2}.βkFR​=∥gk−1​∥2∥gk​∥2​,βkPR​=∥gk−1​∥2⟨gk​,gk​−gk−1​⟩​.

Assumptions 2.1: the level set L={x:f(x)≤f(x1)}\mathcal L = \{x : f(x) \le f(x_1)\}L={x:f(x)≤f(x1​)} is bounded, and on an open neighbourhood N\mathcal NN of L\mathcal LL the gradient is Lipschitz: ∥g(x)−g(x~)∥≤L∥x−x~∥\|g(x) - g(\tilde x)\| \le L\|x - \tilde x\|∥g(x)−g(x~)∥≤L∥x−x~∥.

A steplength satisfies the Wolfe conditions with 0<σ1<σ2<10 < \sigma_1 < \sigma_2 < 10<σ1​<σ2​<1 if

f(xk+αkdk)≤f(xk)+σ1αk⟨gk,dk⟩,⟨g(xk+αkdk),dk⟩≥σ2⟨gk,dk⟩,f(x_k + \alpha_k d_k) \le f(x_k) + \sigma_1\alpha_k\langle g_k, d_k\rangle,\qquad \langle g(x_k+\alpha_k d_k), d_k\rangle \ge \sigma_2\langle g_k, d_k\rangle,f(xk​+αk​dk​)≤f(xk​)+σ1​αk​⟨gk​,dk​⟩,⟨g(xk​+αk​dk​),dk​⟩≥σ2​⟨gk​,dk​⟩,

and the strong Wolfe conditions if the second inequality is replaced by ∣⟨g(xk+αkdk),dk⟩∣≤−σ2⟨gk,dk⟩|\langle g(x_k+\alpha_k d_k), d_k\rangle| \le -\sigma_2\langle g_k, d_k\rangle∣⟨g(xk​+αk​dk​),dk​⟩∣≤−σ2​⟨gk​,dk​⟩. The angle θk\theta_kθk​ between −gk-g_k−gk​ and dkd_kdk​ is given by cos⁡θk=−⟨gk,dk⟩/(∥gk∥∥dk∥)\cos\theta_k = -\langle g_k, d_k\rangle/(\|g_k\|\|d_k\|)cosθk​=−⟨gk​,dk​⟩/(∥gk​∥∥dk​∥), and the Zoutendijk condition is ∑k≥1cos⁡2θk∥gk∥2<∞\sum_{k\ge1}\cos^2\theta_k\|g_k\|^2 < \infty∑k≥1​cos2θk​∥gk​∥2<∞.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

Under Assumptions 2.1, for any method of the above form with

∣βk∣≤βkFR(k≥2)|\beta_k| \le \beta_k^{FR}\quad (k \ge 2)∣βk​∣≤βkFR​(k≥2)

and steplengths satisfying the strong Wolfe conditions with 0<σ1<σ2<120 < \sigma_1 < \sigma_2 < \tfrac120<σ1​<σ2​<21​,

lim inf⁡k→∞∥gk∥=0.\liminf_{k\to\infty}\|g_k\| = 0 .k→∞liminf​∥gk​∥=0.

The sequence βk\beta_kβk​ is arbitrary within the bound; the statement contains no constants.

Milestones

  • Theorem 2.1 (i) (Zoutendijk): for any iteration xk+1=xk+αkdkx_{k+1} = x_k + \alpha_k d_kxk+1​=xk​+αk​dk​ with descent directions and Wolfe steps, ∑k≥1cos⁡2θk∥gk∥2<∞\sum_{k\ge1}\cos^2\theta_k\|g_k\|^2 < \infty∑k≥1​cos2θk​∥gk​∥2<∞.
  • Lemma 3.1: under ∣βk∣≤βkFR|\beta_k| \le \beta_k^{FR}∣βk​∣≤βkFR​ and the strong Wolfe curvature condition with σ2<12\sigma_2 < \tfrac12σ2​<21​, every dkd_kdk​ is a descent direction and
−∑j=0k−1σ2j≤⟨gk,dk⟩∥gk∥2≤−2+∑j=0k−1σ2j.-\sum_{j=0}^{k-1}\sigma_2^j \le \frac{\langle g_k, d_k\rangle}{\|g_k\|^2} \le -2 + \sum_{j=0}^{k-1}\sigma_2^j .−j=0∑k−1​σ2j​≤∥gk​∥2⟨gk​,dk​⟩​≤−2+j=0∑k−1​σ2j​.
  • (3.5): there are c1,c2>0c_1, c_2 > 0c1​,c2​>0 with c1∥gk∥/∥dk∥≤cos⁡θk≤c2∥gk∥/∥dk∥c_1\|g_k\|/\|d_k\| \le \cos\theta_k \le c_2\|g_k\|/\|d_k\|c1​∥gk​∥/∥dk​∥≤cosθk​≤c2​∥gk​∥/∥dk​∥.

Further statements

Theorem 2.1 (ii) (the same conclusion for an ideal line search that does no worse than the first stationary point along dkd_kdk​) and the convergence of the hybrid method (3.7), βk=max⁡(−βkFR,min⁡(βkPR,βkFR))\beta_k = \max(-\beta_k^{FR}, \min(\beta_k^{PR}, \beta_k^{FR}))βk​=max(−βkFR​,min(βkPR​,βkFR​)).

Significance

Theorem 3.2 shows that descent and global convergence of Fletcher–Reeves-type methods do not depend on the exact formula for βk\beta_kβk​, only on the bound ∣βk∣≤βkFR|\beta_k| \le \beta_k^{FR}∣βk​∣≤βkFR​. Its main consequence is the hybrid method (3.7), which keeps the Polak–Ribière choice whenever it lies in [−βkFR,βkFR][-\beta_k^{FR}, \beta_k^{FR}][−βkFR​,βkFR​], and so retains the practical efficiency of Polak–Ribière while inheriting the convergence guarantee of Fletcher–Reeves. Lemma 3.1 also shows that, under these conditions, descent need not be enforced by the line search.

The results are proved in the paper. To our knowledge none of them, nor Zoutendijk's theorem for general iterations, has a machine-checked proof in Lean; Mathlib has no theory of line search methods. A formalization would provide a reusable Zoutendijk theorem for any descent method with Wolfe steps, and a verified convergence statement for the conjugate gradient methods used in practice.

Difficulty

The obvious route to convergence of a descent method is to show cos⁡θk\cos\theta_kcosθk​ bounded away from zero and apply Zoutendijk's condition. For conjugate gradient methods this fails: dkd_kdk​ accumulates previous directions and cos⁡θk\cos\theta_kcosθk​ can tend to zero. The argument must instead control the growth of ∥dk∥\|d_k\|∥dk​∥, which requires bounding ⟨gk,dk−1⟩\langle g_k, d_{k-1}\rangle⟨gk​,dk−1​⟩ through the line search, and this in turn requires knowing that every dkd_kdk​ is a descent direction with ⟨gk,dk⟩\langle g_k, d_k\rangle⟨gk​,dk​⟩ comparable to ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2. The threshold σ2<12\sigma_2 < \tfrac12σ2​<21​ is exactly what keeps the geometric series in these bounds below 222; the result fails without it.

Formalization scope

All items live in the namespace NonlinCG.FRBound. The space is a finite-dimensional real inner product space E (the paper uses "the scalar product used to compute the gradient"), and gradient f is the gradient for that product. Conventions committed to:

  • Indexing follows the paper: sequences ℕ → E, used from index 1; index 0 is never constrained.
  • Smoothness: every statement assumes fff globally C1C^1C1, from (1.1) "f is smooth", in addition to Assumptions 2.1 (bounded level set; C1C^1C1 and Lipschitz gradient on an open neighbourhood N\mathcal NN of L\mathcal LL, with L>0L > 0L>0).
  • Steplengths are positive, as in the paper's line searches.
  • βk\beta_kβk​ is a free sequence constrained by ∣βk∣≤βkFR|\beta_k| \le \beta_k^{FR}∣βk​∣≤βkFR​, not the Fletcher–Reeves formula. Fixing βk=βkFR\beta_k = \beta_k^{FR}βk​=βkFR​ would state Al-Baali's theorem instead.
  • Division: βFR\beta^{FR}βFR, βPR\beta^{PR}βPR, cos⁡θk\cos\theta_kcosθk​ are Lean divisions (value 0 on a zero denominator). Theorem 3.2 does not assume gk≠0g_k \ne 0gk​=0; Lemma 3.1 and (3.5) assume it, since the paper divides by ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2 there and descent is impossible at gk=0g_k = 0gk​=0.
  • Zoutendijk's sum is the summability of ⟨gk,dk⟩2/∥dk∥2\langle g_k, d_k\rangle^2/\|d_k\|^2⟨gk​,dk​⟩2/∥dk​∥2, which equals cos⁡2θk∥gk∥2\cos^2\theta_k\|g_k\|^2cos2θk​∥gk​∥2 under descent.
  • liminf is stated as: for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 and KKK there is k≥Kk \ge Kk≥K with ∥gk∥<ε\|g_k\| < \varepsilon∥gk​∥<ε.
  • (3.5) asserts existence of the constants only, as the paper does.

The goal does not assume Zoutendijk's condition or descent: both are consequences (Theorem 2.1 and Lemma 3.1) and assuming either would remove part of the theorem's content. The hypotheses are jointly satisfiable (for f(x)=x2/2f(x) = x^2/2f(x)=x2/2 on R\mathbb RR, x1=1x_1 = 1x1​=1, βk=0\beta_k = 0βk​=0, αk=0.9\alpha_k = 0.9αk​=0.9, σ1=0.1\sigma_1 = 0.1σ1​=0.1, σ2=0.25\sigma_2 = 0.25σ2​=0.25), so the goal is not vacuous.

Needed infrastructure: line-search conditions, the descent lemma for functions with Lipschitz gradient on a set, and summability arguments for ∑∥dk∥−2\sum\|d_k\|^{-2}∑∥dk​∥−2. Zoutendijk's theorem is reusable for any descent method. Proofs of any item, and alternative arguments, are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. C. Gilbert, J. Nocedal, Global convergence properties of conjugate gradient methods for optimization, INRIA Rapport de Recherche 1268, 1990. https://hal.inria.fr/inria-00075291 ; SIAM J. Optim. 2(1) (1992) 21–42, https://doi.org/10.1137/0802003
  • M. Al-Baali, Descent property and global convergence of the Fletcher–Reeves method with inexact line search, IMA J. Numer. Anal. 5 (1985) 121–124. https://doi.org/10.1093/imanum/5.1.121
  • R. Fletcher, C. M. Reeves, Function minimization by conjugate gradients, Comput. J. 7 (1964) 149–154. https://doi.org/10.1093/comjnl/7.2.149
  • P. Wolfe, Convergence conditions for ascent methods, SIAM Rev. 11 (1969) 226–235. https://doi.org/10.1137/1011036
  • D. Touati-Ahmed, C. Storey, Efficient hybrid conjugate gradient techniques, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 64 (1990) 379–397. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00939455
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods I: Inexact Newton Backtracking Converges to Every Limit Point Where F′ Is Invertible, That Point Is a Zero of F, and Initial Steps Are Eventually AcceptedResearch Paper

Motivation

Newton's method for a nonlinear system F(x)=0F(x) = 0F(x)=0, with F:Rn→RnF:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn, solves the linear system F′(xk)sk=−F(xk)F'(x_k)s_k = -F(x_k)F′(xk​)sk​=−F(xk​) at every step. For large systems that solve is itself iterative (a Krylov method such as GMRES), and it is stopped early. The resulting inexact Newton methods, introduced by Dembo, Eisenstat and Steihaug (SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 19 (1982)), accept any step with ∥F(xk)+F′(xk)sk∥≤ηk∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s_k\|\le\eta_k\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)sk​∥≤ηk​∥F(xk​)∥, where the forcing term ηk∈[0,1)\eta_k\in[0,1)ηk​∈[0,1) controls how accurately the linear system is solved. Their theory is local: it applies once the iterates are near a solution with invertible derivative.

Practical solvers (Newton–Krylov codes in large-scale simulation, nonlinear solver libraries such as PETSc's SNES and SUNDIALS' KINSOL) combine such inexact steps with a globalization, most often backtracking along the step. Eisenstat and Walker (SIAM J. Optim. 4 (1994)) gave the global convergence theory for this combination: what can be said about the iterates from an arbitrary starting point, with no assumption that a solution exists or that F′F'F′ is invertible anywhere.

Timeline. Dembo, Eisenstat and Steihaug (1982) proved local convergence of inexact Newton methods. Dembo and Steihaug (Math. Program. 26 (1983)) studied truncated Newton methods for unconstrained minimization. Brown and Saad (1990) studied globalized Newton–Krylov methods with line searches and model trust regions, under the inner-product norm. Eisenstat and Walker (1994) gave the general framework treated here, for an arbitrary norm. Their 1996 paper (SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 17) proposed the forcing-term choices that are now standard.

Setting

Let EEE be Rn\mathbb R^nRn with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let F:E→EF:E\to EF:E→E be continuously differentiable with derivative F′(x)F'(x)F′(x). A point x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) if every ball Nδ(x∗)={y:∥y−x∗∥<δ}N_\delta(x_*)=\{y:\|y-x_*\|<\delta\}Nδ​(x∗​)={y:∥y−x∗​∥<δ} contains xkx_kxk​ for infinitely many kkk.

Algorithm GIN (global inexact Newton method). Fix t∈(0,1)t\in(0,1)t∈(0,1). At each kkk, find a level ηk∈[0,1)\eta_k\in[0,1)ηk​∈[0,1) and a step sks_ksk​ with

∥F(xk)+F′(xk)sk∥≤ηk∥F(xk)∥(2.1),∥F(xk+sk)∥≤[1−t(1−ηk)] ∥F(xk)∥(2.2),\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s_k\|\le\eta_k\|F(x_k)\| \quad (2.1),\qquad \|F(x_k+s_k)\|\le[1-t(1-\eta_k)]\,\|F(x_k)\| \quad (2.2),∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)sk​∥≤ηk​∥F(xk​)∥(2.1),∥F(xk​+sk​)∥≤[1−t(1−ηk​)]∥F(xk​)∥(2.2),

and set xk+1=xk+skx_{k+1}=x_k+s_kxk+1​=xk​+sk​. Condition (2.1) says that sks_ksk​ reduces the norm of the local linear model by the factor ηk\eta_kηk​. Condition (2.2) asks that ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥ itself decrease by a fixed fraction ttt of that predicted reduction.

Algorithm MR (minimum reduction method). Fix ηmax⁡∈[0,1)\eta_{\max}\in[0,1)ηmax​∈[0,1) and 0<θmin⁡<θmax⁡<10<\theta_{\min}<\theta_{\max}<10<θmin​<θmax​<1. At step kkk, choose ηˉk∈[0,ηmax⁡]\bar\eta_k\in[0,\eta_{\max}]ηˉ​k​∈[0,ηmax​] and a curve σk\sigma_kσk​ with ∥F(xk)+F′(xk)σk(η)∥≤η∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)\sigma_k(\eta)\|\le\eta\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)σk​(η)∥≤η∥F(xk​)∥ for ηˉk≤η≤1\bar\eta_k\le\eta\le1ηˉ​k​≤η≤1 (5.1). Start at ηk=ηˉk\eta_k=\bar\eta_kηk​=ηˉ​k​. While (2.2) fails for sk=σk(ηk)s_k=\sigma_k(\eta_k)sk​=σk​(ηk​), replace ηk\eta_kηk​ by 1−θ(1−ηk)1-\theta(1-\eta_k)1−θ(1−ηk​) for some θ∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θ∈[θmin​,θmax​]. Then set xk+1=xk+σk(ηk)x_{k+1}=x_k+\sigma_k(\eta_k)xk+1​=xk​+σk​(ηk​).

Algorithm INB (inexact Newton backtracking). Choose ηˉk∈[0,ηmax⁡]\bar\eta_k\in[0,\eta_{\max}]ηˉ​k​∈[0,ηmax​] and an inexact Newton step sˉk\bar s_ksˉk​ at level ηˉk\bar\eta_kηˉ​k​. While (2.2) fails, shorten the step, sk←θsks_k\leftarrow\theta s_ksk​←θsk​, and raise the level, ηk←1−θ(1−ηk)\eta_k\leftarrow1-\theta(1-\eta_k)ηk​←1−θ(1−ηk​). INB is MR with the backtracking curve σk(η)=1−η1−ηˉksˉk\sigma_k(\eta)=\frac{1-\eta}{1-\bar\eta_k}\bar s_kσk​(η)=1−ηˉ​k​1−η​sˉk​ (6.1).

An algorithm does not break down if it produces an infinite sequence of iterates, in particular if every while-loop exits.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1 (global convergence of Algorithm INB)

If Algorithm INB does not break down and x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) at which F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) is invertible, then

F(x∗)=0,xk→x∗,sk=sˉk and ηk=ηˉk for all sufficiently large k.F(x_*)=0,\qquad x_k\to x_*,\qquad s_k=\bar s_k\ \text{and}\ \eta_k=\bar\eta_k\ \text{for all sufficiently large }k.F(x∗​)=0,xk​→x∗​,sk​=sˉk​ and ηk​=ηˉ​k​ for all sufficiently large k.

The statement assumes no solution, bounded level set, Lipschitz derivative or particular norm. The last clause says that backtracking eventually stops, so the local rate is governed by the forcing terms ηˉk\bar\eta_kηˉ​k​.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Lemmas 1.1 and 1.2. Continuity of y↦F′(y)−1y\mapsto F'(y)^{-1}y↦F′(y)−1 at an invertible point, and a uniform linearization error ∥F(z)−F(y)−F′(y)(z−y)∥≤ε∥z−y∥\|F(z)-F(y)-F'(y)(z-y)\|\le\varepsilon\|z-y\|∥F(z)−F(y)−F′(y)(z−y)∥≤ε∥z−y∥ near xxx.
  2. Theorem 3.3. If F(xk)→0F(x_k)\to0F(xk​)→0, the steps satisfy (2.1) with a fixed η\etaη, and ∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)∥ is nonincreasing, then an invertible limit point is a zero and the limit.
  3. Theorem 3.4. A GIN run with ∑k(1−ηk)=∞\sum_k(1-\eta_k)=\infty∑k​(1−ηk​)=∞ has F(xk)→0F(x_k)\to0F(xk​)→0, plus the conclusion of Theorem 3.3 at invertible limit points.
  4. Theorem 3.5. A GIN run converges to a limit point near which ∥sk∥≤Γ(1−ηk)∥F(xk)∥\|s_k\|\le\Gamma(1-\eta_k)\|F(x_k)\|∥sk​∥≤Γ(1−ηk​)∥F(xk​)∥ (3.2).
  5. Lemma 5.1. The while-loop terminates, with 1−ηk≥min⁡{1−ηˉk,θmin⁡δ/(Γ∥F(xk)∥)}1-\eta_k\ge\min\{1-\bar\eta_k,\theta_{\min}\delta/(\Gamma\|F(x_k)\|)\}1−ηk​≥min{1−ηˉ​k​,θmin​δ/(Γ∥F(xk​)∥)}.
  6. MR runs are GIN runs (§5).
  7. Theorem 5.2 for MR. Under ∥σk(η)∥≤Γ(1−η)∥F(xk)∥\|\sigma_k(\eta)\|\le\Gamma(1-\eta)\|F(x_k)\|∥σk​(η)∥≤Γ(1−η)∥F(xk​)∥ near a limit point x∗x_*x∗​ (5.6): F(x∗)=0F(x_*)=0F(x∗​)=0, xk→x∗x_k\to x_*xk​→x∗​, and ηk=ηˉk\eta_k=\bar\eta_kηk​=ηˉ​k​ eventually.
  8. INB runs are MR runs with the curve (6.1), and sk=σk(ηk)s_k=\sigma_k(\eta_k)sk​=σk​(ηk​) throughout the loop (§6).

Further items, which are not milestones: Corollary 6.2 (exact Newton with backtracking takes full Newton steps eventually), Theorem 5.2 for Algorithm TL, Lemma 3.1 (existence of acceptable GIN steps), and Proposition 2.1 (the Goldstein–Armijo alpha condition implies (2.2) in the Euclidean norm).

Significance

The result. Theorem 6.1 is the global convergence guarantee for the inexact Newton backtracking method that Newton–Krylov solvers implement. It separates three outcomes: the iterates diverge, they accumulate only at points where F′F'F′ is singular, or they converge to a solution with invertible derivative and eventually take the unmodified inexact Newton steps. In the third case the local theory of Dembo, Eisenstat and Steihaug applies from some iteration on, so the forcing terms alone set the convergence rate. Theorem 5.2 is the template: §§6–8 of the paper derive the convergence of backtracking, equality-curve and dogleg-type methods from it by verifying (5.6).

Formalizing it. The results are proved on paper and none of them has a machine-checked proof that we know of. The mission produces a library of algorithm-run predicates with explicit while-loops for inexact Newton methods. It also checks the paper's reduction chain (INB is a run of MR, MR is a run of GIN) and the global convergence theorems in an arbitrary finite-dimensional norm.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at both ends. Sufficient decrease (2.2) alone gives monotonicity of ∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)∥, but not convergence of the iterates. On the page, F(x)=x2−1F(x)=x^2-1F(x)=x2−1 admits sequences satisfying (2.2) with both ±1\pm1±1 as limit points. Convergence of ∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)∥ to 000 needs ∑(1−ηk)=∞\sum(1-\eta_k)=\infty∑(1−ηk​)=∞, and nothing in the algorithm states this. In Theorem 5.2 it has to be derived from the exit level of the while-loop, which depends on a neighbourhood of x∗x_*x∗​ where the linearization error is uniformly controlled. A solver must combine a limit-point argument (only infinitely many iterates are near x∗x_*x∗​, not all of them) with the loop's worst-case backtracking factor θmin⁡\theta_{\min}θmin​. The invertibility of F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) enters only through the bound (5.6) for the backtracking curve, which must be established uniformly in kkk.

Formalization scope

  • Space and norm. EEE is a finite-dimensional real normed space ([NormedAddCommGroup E] [NormedSpace ℝ E] [FiniteDimensional ℝ E]). This is exactly "Rn\mathbb R^nRn with an arbitrary norm". Fin n → ℝ (sup norm) and EuclideanSpace would each fix one norm. Only Proposition 2.1 assumes an inner product space, as the page does.
  • Derivative. F′F'F′ is fderiv ℝ F, with ContDiff ℝ 1 F (the paper's standing assumption). Invertibility is ContinuousLinearMap.IsInvertible, and F′(x)−1F'(x)^{-1}F′(x)−1 is ContinuousLinearMap.inverse.
  • Runs. An algorithm that does not break down is a predicate on infinite sequences (IsGINRun, IsMRRun, IsINBRun, plus IsTLRun, IsENBRun). The steps and levels the algorithm says to "find" or "choose" are data constrained only by the stated conditions. A while-loop is recorded by its number of passes mkm_kmk​ and factors θk,j∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta_{k,j}\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θk,j​∈[θmin​,θmax​]. Every trial before the last fails the loop's test and the last one passes it. Termination is part of the run.
  • Limit point is MapClusterPt xstar atTop x. "For all sufficiently large kkk" is ∀ᶠ k in atTop. The paper's "whenever xkx_kxk​ is sufficiently near x∗x_*x∗​ [and kkk is sufficiently large]" is ∃ Γ, ∃ δ > 0, [∃ K,] ∀ k [≥ K], x k ∈ ball xstar δ → …. Γ\GammaΓ precedes kkk ("independent of kkk"), and the "kkk large" clause appears only in (3.2), where the page has it.
  • Hypotheses as printed. Theorems 3.5 and 5.2 do not assume F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) invertible. Theorem 5.2 does not assume ∑(1−ηk)=∞\sum(1-\eta_k)=\infty∑(1−ηk​)=∞. Lemma 5.1 is stated for one iteration of the loop shared by MR and TL, for every choice of factors.
  • Trivializing readings ruled out. A run predicate without the "rejected" clause would allow needless backtracking, and one without the "accepted" clause would drop (2.2). Both clauses are present. A sorry-free check (F = id on R\mathbb RR) confirms that the INB, GIN and ENB run predicates and the goal's hypotheses are satisfiable, so the goal is not vacuous.
  • Infrastructure. Continuity of operator inversion and uniform differentiability on neighbourhoods are in Mathlib. The run predicates and trial-level recursions are reusable for any line-search or backtracking analysis. Each milestone is stated independently; contributions in any order are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. C. Eisenstat and H. F. Walker, Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM J. Optim. 4(2) (1994) 393–422. https://doi.org/10.1137/0804022
  • R. S. Dembo, S. C. Eisenstat and T. Steihaug, Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 19(2) (1982) 400–408. https://doi.org/10.1137/0719025
  • R. S. Dembo and T. Steihaug, Truncated-Newton algorithms for large-scale unconstrained optimization, Math. Program. 26 (1983) 190–212. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02592055
  • P. N. Brown and Y. Saad, Hybrid Krylov Methods for Nonlinear Systems of Equations, SIAM J. Sci. Stat. Comput. 11(3) (1990) 450–481. https://doi.org/10.1137/0911026
  • S. C. Eisenstat and H. F. Walker, Choosing the Forcing Terms in an Inexact Newton Method, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 17(1) (1996) 16–32. https://doi.org/10.1137/0917003
  • J. E. Dennis and R. B. Schnabel, Numerical Methods for Unconstrained Optimization and Nonlinear Equations, SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 16 (1996). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971200
12 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Mean-Variance Hedging in Continuous Time: The Feedback Futures Strategy Φ(G*) Minimizes the Expected Squared Deviation of Terminal Wealth from Any Target LevelResearch Paper

Motivation

A firm that will receive or deliver a quantity of a commodity, currency or security at a future date carries price risk until that date. When the asset itself cannot be traded in the meantime, the standard instrument for reducing that risk is a futures contract on a correlated asset: the firm takes a position in futures and adjusts it over time, and the gains or losses of the futures position offset part of the movement of its commitment. Choosing that position is the hedging problem. The classical answer, the minimum-variance hedge ratio, is a static one-period rule. Duffie and Richardson (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1991) solved the dynamic version in continuous time with a quadratic criterion: minimize the expected squared deviation of terminal wealth from a target. Their explicit feedback solution became a reference point for the later literature on mean-variance hedging in incomplete markets (Schweizer, Gouriéroux–Laurent–Pham, and others), where the same quadratic criterion is studied under general semimartingale prices.

Setting

Fix a horizon T>0T>0T>0 and a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) carrying a two-dimensional standard Brownian motion (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε) with its filtration F\mathbb FF. Let μ,σ,m,v,ρ\mu,\sigma,m,v,\rhoμ,σ,m,v,ρ be bounded measurable functions on [0,T][0,T][0,T], with ∣v∣|v|∣v∣ bounded away from zero and ρt∈[−1,1]\rho_t\in[-1,1]ρt​∈[−1,1]. The Brownian motion ξt=∫0tρs dBs+∫0t1−ρs2 dεs\xi_t=\int_0^t\rho_s\,dB_s+\int_0^t\sqrt{1-\rho_s^2}\,d\varepsilon_sξt​=∫0t​ρs​dBs​+∫0t​1−ρs2​​dεs​ has instantaneous correlation ρ\rhoρ with BBB. The committed asset SSS and the futures price FFF follow

dSt=μtSt dt+σtSt dBt,dFt=mtFt dt+vtFt dξt,S0,F0>0.dS_t=\mu_tS_t\,dt+\sigma_tS_t\,dB_t,\qquad dF_t=m_tF_t\,dt+v_tF_t\,d\xi_t,\qquad S_0,F_0>0.dSt​=μt​St​dt+σt​St​dBt​,dFt​=mt​Ft​dt+vt​Ft​dξt​,S0​,F0​>0.

The hedger is committed to kkk units of SSS at time TTT. A trading strategy is a progressively measurable process θ\thetaθ (the futures position) with E∫0Tθt2Ft2 dt<∞E\int_0^T\theta_t^2F_t^2\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​θt2​Ft2​dt<∞; Θ\ThetaΘ denotes the set of them. Its futures gain is the stochastic integral G(θ)t=∫0tθs dFsG(\theta)_t=\int_0^t\theta_s\,dF_sG(θ)t​=∫0t​θs​dFs​, and the terminal wealth is W(θ)=kST+G(θ)TW(\theta)=kS_T+G(\theta)_TW(θ)=kST​+G(θ)T​. Given a target level L∈RL\in\mathbb RL∈R, problem (3) is

min⁡θ∈ΘE[(W(θ)−L)2].\min_{\theta\in\Theta}E\big[(W(\theta)-L)^2\big].θ∈Θmin​E[(W(θ)−L)2].

With γt=mtσtρt/vt−μt\gamma_t=m_t\sigma_t\rho_t/v_t-\mu_tγt​=mt​σt​ρt​/vt​−μt​, the tracking process is Zt=kexp⁡(−∫tTγs ds)StZ_t=k\exp(-\int_t^T\gamma_s\,ds)S_tZt​=kexp(−∫tT​γs​ds)St​, so that ZT=kSTZ_T=kS_TZT​=kST​, and the feedback map is

Φ(Gt∗)=1Ft[mtvt2(L−Zt−Gt∗)−σtρtvtZt],\Phi(G^*_t)=\frac1{F_t}\Big[\frac{m_t}{v_t^2}(L-Z_t-G^*_t)-\frac{\sigma_t\rho_t}{v_t}Z_t\Big],Φ(Gt∗​)=Ft​1​[vt2​mt​​(L−Zt​−Gt∗​)−vt​σt​ρt​​Zt​],

where G∗G^*G∗ solves dGt∗=Φ(Gt∗) dFtdG^*_t=\Phi(G^*_t)\,dF_tdGt∗​=Φ(Gt∗​)dFt​, G0∗=0G^*_0=0G0∗​=0. The strategy φ=Φ(G∗)\varphi=\Phi(G^*)φ=Φ(G∗) depends only on the gains realized so far and the current price StS_tSt​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 1

φt=Φ(Gt∗)  solves  min⁡θ∈ΘE[(kST+G(θ)T−L)2]\varphi_t=\Phi(G^*_t)\ \text{ solves }\ \min_{\theta\in\Theta}E\big[(kS_T+G(\theta)_T-L)^2\big]φt​=Φ(Gt∗​)  solves  θ∈Θmin​E[(kST​+G(θ)T​−L)2]

for every commitment kkk, every target LLL and every solution G∗G^*G∗ of (10). No constant is hard-coded: the statement is the paper's for arbitrary coefficients satisfying the standing hypotheses.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1: φ∈Θ\varphi\in\Thetaφ∈Θ is optimal iff E[(L−kST−G(φ)T) G(θ)T]=0E[(L-kS_T-G(\varphi)_T)\,G(\theta)_T]=0E[(L−kST​−G(φ)T​)G(θ)T​]=0 for every θ∈Θ\theta\in\Thetaθ∈Θ.
  2. Existence (§3.3): equation (10) has a solution with Gt∗∈L2(P)G^*_t\in L^2(P)Gt∗​∈L2(P).
  3. Itô dynamics of ZZZ: dZt=(γt+μt)Zt dt+σtZt dBtdZ_t=(\gamma_t+\mu_t)Z_t\,dt+\sigma_tZ_t\,dB_tdZt​=(γt​+μt​)Zt​dt+σt​Zt​dBt​.
  4. Moment equations for E(ZtGt)E(Z_tG_t)E(Zt​Gt​), E(Gt∗Gt)E(G^*_tG_t)E(Gt∗​Gt​) and E(Gt)E(G_t)E(Gt​), with G=G(θ)G=G(\theta)G=G(θ).
  5. Lemma 2: Ht=E[(L−Zt−Gt∗)G(θ)t]H_t=E[(L-Z_t-G^*_t)G(\theta)_t]Ht​=E[(L−Zt​−Gt∗​)G(θ)t​] satisfies H˙t=−(mt2/vt2)Ht\dot H_t=-(m_t^2/v_t^2)H_tH˙t​=−(mt2​/vt2​)Ht​.
  6. The solution of (13): Ht=H0exp⁡(−∫0tms2/vs2 ds)H_t=H_0\exp(-\int_0^tm_s^2/v_s^2\,ds)Ht​=H0​exp(−∫0t​ms2​/vs2​ds).

Two further items, not milestones, formalize §4: Lemma 3 (a solution of (3) is mean-variance efficient) and §4.1 (maximizing the quadratic utility E[W−cW2]E[W-cW^2]E[W−cW2], c>0c>0c>0, is problem (3) with L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)).

Significance

Proposition 1 gives the optimal dynamic hedge in closed feedback form for every target level at once. Varying LLL traces out the whole mean-variance frontier of terminal wealth (Lemma 3), and the choice L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c)L=1/(2c) solves the quadratic-utility problem (§4.1); the minimum-variance hedge of §4.3 of the paper is obtained by optimizing over LLL. The result is also an instance of a general pattern: a quadratic hedging problem in an incomplete market reduces to an L2L^2L2 projection onto the space of attainable gains, and the projection is computed by a linear SDE.

The result is proved in the paper, in six pages. No machine-checked version of it, or of any continuous-time hedging result, exists on the platform. A formalization requires Itô's formula for products of Itô processes, the zero-mean property of square-integrable stochastic integrals, Fubini's theorem for moments, and existence for a linear SDE with an Itô-process forcing term; each of these is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The projection step (Lemma 1) is Hilbert-space geometry and the final ODE step is Grönwall. The difficulty lies in between: the orthogonality E[(L−kST−GT∗)G(θ)T]=0E[(L-kS_T-G^*_T)G(\theta)_T]=0E[(L−kST​−GT∗​)G(θ)T​]=0 must be verified against every trading strategy θ\thetaθ, about which only E∫0Tθt2Ft2 dt<∞E\int_0^T\theta_t^2F_t^2\,dt<\inftyE∫0T​θt2​Ft2​dt<∞ is known. A computation that treats θ\thetaθ as bounded, continuous or simple does not suffice. Making the paper's moment computations rigorous requires controlling the integrability of products such as ZtθtFtZ_t\theta_tF_tZt​θt​Ft​ and Gt∗G(θ)tG^*_tG(\theta)_tGt∗​G(θ)t​, proving that the stochastic-integral parts of Itô's product rule are true martingales rather than local martingales, and differentiating expectations in time when the coefficients are only measurable, so that derivatives exist only almost everywhere.

Formalization scope

The stochastic layer is the published definition file Peng1990_SMP_Stochastic (the L2L^2L2 Itô integral and Itô processes on R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​ time), imported, not redefined. The mission commits to the following conventions.

  • (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε) is one R2\mathbb R^2R2-valued standard Brownian motion; BBB is coordinate 0, ε\varepsilonε coordinate 1, and dξd\xidξ is expanded as ρ dB+1−ρ2 dε\rho\,dB+\sqrt{1-\rho^2}\,d\varepsilonρdB+1−ρ2​dε.
  • The filtration is the natural filtration of (B,ε)(B,\varepsilon)(B,ε), not its augmentation, and trading strategies are progressively measurable instead of predictable. Neither change alters the space of terminal gains.
  • Gains are relations: a gain process is any version of the Itô integral, and every statement quantifies over all versions.
  • The objective E[(W−L)2]E[(W-L)^2]E[(W−L)2] and variances take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so a non-square-integrable wealth cannot be optimal through a junk value 000; inner products carry explicit integrability.
  • ρt∈[−1,1]\rho_t\in[-1,1]ρt​∈[−1,1] (§3.1), not [0,1][0,1][0,1] (§2). The sign of vvv is free; only ∣v∣≥δ>0|v|\ge\delta>0∣v∣≥δ>0 is assumed.
  • "Φ(G∗)\Phi(G^*)Φ(G∗) defined by (9)–(11)" means: for every solution of (10), where a solution includes that Φ(G∗)\Phi(G^*)Φ(G∗) is a trading strategy. The paper takes this membership for granted.
  • Lemma 2 and the moment equations are stated in integral form (Ht=H0−∫0t(m2/v2)H dsH_t=H_0-\int_0^t(m^2/v^2)H\,dsHt​=H0​−∫0t​(m2/v2)Hds), which is the paper's "for almost every ttt" derivative together with absolute continuity; continuity of the coefficients is not assumed.
  • The display for dZdZdZ in the proof of Lemma 2 omits dtdtdt; the drift is (γt+μt)Zt dt(\gamma_t+\mu_t)Z_t\,dt(γt​+μt​)Zt​dt.
  • In §4.1, c>0c>0c>0 is assumed explicitly.

Proposition 1 would hold vacuously if equation (10) had no solution; the existence milestone rules this out and must be proved, not assumed. Contributions are welcome on Itô's product formula and the martingale property of Itô integrals in the Peng framework, on the existence of solutions of linear SDEs, and on the Grönwall-type uniqueness for (13).

Selected references

  • D. Duffie, H. R. Richardson, Mean-Variance Hedging in Continuous Time, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(1) (1991) 1–15. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005978
  • S. Peng, A General Stochastic Maximum Principle for Optimal Control Problems, SIAM J. Control Optim. 28(4) (1990) 966–979. https://doi.org/10.1137/0328054
  • P. Protter, Stochastic Integration and Differential Equations, Springer, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-02619-9
  • D. G. Luenberger, Optimization by Vector Space Methods, Wiley, 1969.
  • M. Schweizer, Mean-Variance Hedging for General Claims, The Annals of Applied Probability 2(1) (1992) 171–179. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005776
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Statistics of Robust Optimization: A Generalized Empirical Likelihood Approach 3: Robust Optimal Values and Solution Sets over f-Divergence Balls Are ConsistentResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic optimization asks for a decision xxx in a set X⊂Rd\mathcal X\subset\mathbb R^dX⊂Rd that minimises an expected loss EP0[ℓ(x;ξ)]E_{P_0}[\ell(x;\xi)]EP0​​[ℓ(x;ξ)] when the distribution P0P_0P0​ of the data ξ\xiξ is known only through a sample ξ1,…,ξn\xi_1,\dots,\xi_nξ1​,…,ξn​. The classical estimator, sample average approximation, replaces P0P_0P0​ by the empirical distribution P^n\widehat P_nPn​. Distributionally robust optimization instead minimises the worst-case expected loss over all distributions close to P^n\widehat P_nPn​. Duchi, Glynn and Namkoong (arXiv:1610.03425v3; Math. Oper. Res. 46(3), 2021) take the neighbourhood to be an fff-divergence ball of radius ρ/n\rho/nρ/n and show that the robust optimal value is a calibrated upper confidence bound for the population optimum, in the spirit of Owen's empirical likelihood.

A confidence bound is useful only if the robust problem still estimates the right thing. Section 5 of the paper answers this: under essentially the conditions that make sample average approximation consistent, the robust optimal value converges to the population optimal value, and the robust minimisers approach the population minimisers. This mission formalizes that consistency result (contribution (iv), p. 3, and §5.1).

Setting

Let ξ1,ξ2,…\xi_1,\xi_2,\dotsξ1​,ξ2​,… be i.i.d. random elements of a separable metric space Ξ\XiΞ with law P0P_0P0​, and let P^n\widehat P_nPn​ be the empirical distribution of ξ1,…,ξn\xi_1,\dots,\xi_nξ1​,…,ξn​. Let ℓ:Rd×Ξ→R\ell:\mathbb R^d\times\Xi\to\mathbb Rℓ:Rd×Ξ→R be lower semicontinuous on X×Ξ\mathcal X\times\XiX×Ξ, with ℓ(x;⋅)\ell(x;\cdot)ℓ(x;⋅) measurable for x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X, and let X⊂Rd\mathcal X\subset\mathbb R^dX⊂Rd be a nonempty closed feasible set, as in the paper's opening setup (p. 1).

The divergence generator f:[0,∞)→R∪{+∞}f:[0,\infty)\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}f:[0,∞)→R∪{+∞} is convex with f(1)=0f(1)=0f(1)=0; Assumption A asks moreover that fff be three times differentiable near 111 with f′(1)=0f'(1)=0f′(1)=0 and f′′(1)=2f''(1)=2f′′(1)=2. For a distribution P≪P^nP\ll\widehat P_nP≪Pn​ with weights pip_ipi​ on the sample points, Df(P∥P^n)=1n∑if(npi)D_f(P\|\widehat P_n)=\frac1n\sum_i f(np_i)Df​(P∥Pn​)=n1​∑i​f(npi​). The robust objective and the population objective are

F^n(x)=sup⁡P≪P^n{EP[ℓ(x;ξ)]:Df(P∥P^n)≤ρn},F(x)=EP0[ℓ(x;ξ)],\widehat F_n(x)=\sup_{P\ll\widehat P_n}\Big\{E_P[\ell(x;\xi)] : D_f(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\frac{\rho}{n}\Big\},\qquad F(x)=E_{P_0}[\ell(x;\xi)],Fn​(x)=P≪Pn​sup​{EP​[ℓ(x;ξ)]:Df​(P∥Pn​)≤nρ​},F(x)=EP0​​[ℓ(x;ξ)],

with radius parameter ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0. Their solution sets are SP^n⋆=argmin⁡x∈XF^n(x)S^\star_{\widehat P_n}=\operatorname{argmin}_{x\in\mathcal X}\widehat F_n(x)SPn​⋆​=argminx∈X​Fn​(x) and SP0⋆=argmin⁡x∈XF(x)S^\star_{P_0}=\operatorname{argmin}_{x\in\mathcal X}F(x)SP0​⋆​=argminx∈X​F(x) (display (23)). The inclusion distance from a set AAA to a set BBB is d⊂(A,B)=sup⁡x∈Adist⁡(x,B)d_\subset(A,B)=\sup_{x\in A}\operatorname{dist}(x,B)d⊂​(A,B)=supx∈A​dist(x,B) (display (6)).

Assumption E asks for a measurable envelope Z≥0Z\ge0Z≥0 with ∣ℓ(x;ξ)∣≤Z(ξ)|\ell(x;\xi)|\le Z(\xi)∣ℓ(x;ξ)∣≤Z(ξ) for all x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X and EP0[Z1+ϵ]<∞E_{P_0}[Z^{1+\epsilon}]<\inftyEP0​​[Z1+ϵ]<∞ for some ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0. A class H\mathcal HH of functions on Ξ\XiΞ is Glivenko–Cantelli (Definition 2) if sup⁡h∈H∣EP^n[h]−EP0[h]∣→0\sup_{h\in\mathcal H}|E_{\widehat P_n}[h]-E_{P_0}[h]|\to0suph∈H​∣EPn​​[h]−EP0​​[h]∣→0 almost surely.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 1 (p. 17)

Let Assumptions A and E hold, let X\mathcal XX be nonempty and compact, and let ℓ(⋅;ξ)\ell(\cdot;\xi)ℓ(⋅;ξ) be continuous on X\mathcal XX for every ξ\xiξ. Then, in outer probability,

inf⁡x∈XF^n(x)−inf⁡x∈XF(x)→P∗0andd⊂(SP^n⋆,SP0⋆)→P∗0.\inf_{x\in\mathcal X}\widehat F_n(x)-\inf_{x\in\mathcal X}F(x)\xrightarrow{P^*}0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad d_\subset\big(S^\star_{\widehat P_n},S^\star_{P_0}\big)\xrightarrow{P^*}0 .x∈Xinf​Fn​(x)−x∈Xinf​F(x)P∗​0andd⊂​(SPn​⋆​,SP0​⋆​)P∗​0.

Both conclusions belong to the goal. No rate is asserted; the statement survives any later sharpening.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 13 (p. 34): the likelihood-ratio vectors of the ball satisfy ∥np−1∥2≤ρCf\|np-\mathbb 1\|_2\le\sqrt{\rho C_f}∥np−1∥2​≤ρCf​​ uniformly in nnn, and the bound is of the right order (≥ρcf\ge\sqrt{\rho c_f}≥ρcf​​ for some n,pn,pn,p).
  2. (47) (App. E.1, p. 46): ∣EP[ℓ]−EP0[ℓ]∣≤EP^n[∣L−1∣p]1/pEP^n[∣ℓ∣q]1/q+∣EP^n[ℓ]−EP0[ℓ]∣|E_P[\ell]-E_{P_0}[\ell]|\le E_{\widehat P_n}[|L-1|^p]^{1/p}E_{\widehat P_n}[|\ell|^q]^{1/q}+|E_{\widehat P_n}[\ell]-E_{P_0}[\ell]|∣EP​[ℓ]−EP0​​[ℓ]∣≤EPn​​[∣L−1∣p]1/pEPn​​[∣ℓ∣q]1/q+∣EPn​​[ℓ]−EP0​​[ℓ]∣ with q=min⁡{2,1+ϵ}q=\min\{2,1+\epsilon\}q=min{2,1+ϵ}, p=max⁡{2,1+1/ϵ}p=\max\{2,1+1/\epsilon\}p=max{2,1+1/ϵ}.
  3. The display after (47) (p. 46): EP^n[∣L−1∣p]1/p≤n−1/pρCfE_{\widehat P_n}[|L-1|^p]^{1/p}\le n^{-1/p}\sqrt{\rho C_f}EPn​​[∣L−1∣p]1/p≤n−1/pρCf​​.
  4. Theorem 7 (p. 16): if {ℓ(x;⋅):x∈X}\{\ell(x;\cdot):x\in\mathcal X\}{ℓ(x;⋅):x∈X} is Glivenko–Cantelli, then
sup⁡x∈Xsup⁡P≪P^n{∣EP[ℓ(x;ξ)]−EP0[ℓ(x;ξ)]∣:Df(P∥P^n)≤ρn}→a.s.∗0.\sup_{x\in\mathcal X}\sup_{P\ll\widehat P_n}\Big\{|E_P[\ell(x;\xi)]-E_{P_0}[\ell(x;\xi)]| : D_f(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\tfrac{\rho}{n}\Big\}\xrightarrow{\text{a.s.}^*}0.x∈Xsup​P≪Pn​sup​{∣EP​[ℓ(x;ξ)]−EP0​​[ℓ(x;ξ)]∣:Df​(P∥Pn​)≤nρ​}a.s.∗​0.
  1. Example 5 (p. 16, from van der Vaart, Asymptotic Statistics, Example 19.8): a class of losses continuous on a compact X\mathcal XX for almost every ξ\xiξ, with an integrable envelope, is Glivenko–Cantelli.

Significance

The result. Corollary 1 shows that robustness against a ρ/n\rho/nρ/n-divergence perturbation of the data costs nothing asymptotically: the robust optimal value and its minimisers are consistent for the population problem. Together with the paper's coverage theorem, this justifies using the robust value both as a point estimate and as an upper confidence bound. Theorem 7 is stronger than what the corollary needs: it controls every reweighting in the ball uniformly over X\mathcal XX, which is the uniform law of large numbers for distributionally robust objectives, and it needs only slightly more than the first moment that sample average approximation needs.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper; none is machine-checked. A formal development would supply a Glivenko–Cantelli notion for parametric loss classes, the bracketing argument behind Example 5 (a uniform strong law over a compact parameter set, not in Mathlib), and the passage from uniform convergence of objectives to convergence of optimal values and of argmin sets in the inclusion distance. The last two are standard steps of M-estimation and sample average approximation theory that are reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The obvious argument writes EP[ℓ]−EP0[ℓ]E_P[\ell]-E_{P_0}[\ell]EP​[ℓ]−EP0​​[ℓ] as a reweighting term plus the ordinary empirical deviation and handles the second by the Glivenko–Cantelli property. The reweighting term 1n∑i(npi−1)ℓ(x;ξi)\frac1n\sum_i(np_i-1)\ell(x;\xi_i)n1​∑i​(npi​−1)ℓ(x;ξi​) is the obstacle: the weights npinp_inpi​ are not bounded uniformly in nnn for every divergence, and a Cauchy–Schwarz bound would need a second moment of the envelope, which Assumption E does not provide. The exponent pair (p,q)(p,q)(p,q) and the uniform ℓ2\ell_2ℓ2​ control of Lemma 13 are what make 1+ϵ1+\epsilon1+ϵ moments enough.

For the solution sets, uniform convergence of F^n\widehat F_nFn​ to FFF does not by itself place the minimisers of F^n\widehat F_nFn​ near those of FFF; compactness of X\mathcal XX and continuity of FFF are needed to separate FFF on the complement of an ϵ\epsilonϵ-enlargement of SP0⋆S^\star_{P_0}SP0​⋆​ from its minimum. Measurability is a further obstacle: suprema over uncountable X\mathcal XX and over the divergence ball need not be measurable, which is why the paper works with outer probability and outer almost-sure convergence.

Formalization scope

  • Samples are ξ : ℕ → Ω → Ξ on a probability space, measurable, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and identically distributed with ξ 0; P0P_0P0​ is the law of ξ 0, and P^n\widehat P_nPn​ uses ξ 0, …, ξ (n-1) (0-based indices). The separable metric sample domain and lower semicontinuous loss from p. 1 are explicit in Theorem 7 and Corollary 1. Decisions live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); ℓ x is measurable for each x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X.
  • fff is ℝ → EReal satisfying the published IsPhiDivergenceFunction (never −∞-\infty−∞, finite on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), f(1)=0f(1)=0f(1)=0, convex on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞)) plus the smoothness of Assumption A, stated on t↦(f t).toRealt\mapsto(f\,t).\mathrm{toReal}t↦(ft).toReal on an open interval around 111.
  • A distribution P≪P^nP\ll\widehat P_nP≪Pn​ in the ball is a weight vector in the published probUncertaintySet f (1/n,…,1/n) (ρ/n), i.e. {p≥0:∑pi=1, ∑if(npi)≤ρ}\{p\ge0:\sum p_i=1,\ \sum_i f(np_i)\le\rho\}{p≥0:∑pi​=1, ∑i​f(npi​)≤ρ}. Every supremum "over PPP with Df(P∥P^n)≤ρ/nD_f(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\rho/nDf​(P∥Pn​)≤ρ/n" is read over P≪P^nP\ll\widehat P_nP≪Pn​, as in (4a).
  • Suprema of absolute deviations (Definition 2, Theorem 7) are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and d⊂d_\subsetd⊂​ is [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued; an unbounded family therefore cannot satisfy them through a junk real supremum of 000. Almost-sure statements use Mathlib's ∀ᵐ, which requires the exceptional set to have outer measure zero; convergence in outer probability is μ{ω:δ<∣Xn(ω)∣}→0\mu\{\omega:\delta<|X_n(\omega)|\}\to0μ{ω:δ<∣Xn​(ω)∣}→0 for every δ>0\delta>0δ>0 with Mathlib's outer measure and no measurability hypothesis.
  • Readings recorded in the items: in (47) the middle term is EP^n[∣L−1∣ ∣ℓ∣]E_{\widehat P_n}[|L-1|\,|\ell|]EPn​​[∣L−1∣∣ℓ∣] (the page omits the absolute value on ℓ\ellℓ); in the display after (47), ρ/γf\sqrt{\rho/\gamma_f}ρ/γf​​ is ρCf\sqrt{\rho C_f}ρCf​​ with CfC_fCf​ from Lemma 13; in Lemma 13 the constants may depend on ρ\rhoρ as well as fff, as in its proof.
  • A trivializing formalization would take the suprema in R\mathbb RR (where an unbounded set has supremum 000), or allow the argmin sets to be empty by construction; neither is possible here, and nonemptiness of the solution sets is not assumed.
  • Contributions welcome: a Glivenko–Cantelli library for parametric classes (Example 5), the deterministic inequalities (47) and Lemma 13, and the argmin-consistency argument of Corollary 1.

Selected references

  • J. C. Duchi, P. W. Glynn, H. Namkoong, Statistics of Robust Optimization: A Generalized Empirical Likelihood Approach, arXiv:1610.03425v3, 2018; Math. Oper. Res. 46(3), 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.03425 , https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.2020.1085
  • A. W. van der Vaart, Asymptotic Statistics, Cambridge University Press, 1998 (Example 19.8). https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511802256
  • A. W. van der Vaart, J. A. Wellner, Weak Convergence and Empirical Processes, Springer, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4757-2545-2
  • A. B. Owen, Empirical Likelihood, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1201/9781420036152
  • A. Ben-Tal, D. den Hertog, A. De Waegenaere, B. Melenberg, G. Rennen, Robust Solutions of Optimization Problems Affected by Uncertain Probabilities, Management Science 59(2), 2013. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1120.1641
16 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Deterministic Equivalents for Optimizing and Satisficing under Chance Constraints 1: Under Normality, the E-Model Chance Constraints Are Equivalent to the Convex Program (29)Research Paper

Motivation

Chance-constrained programming replaces a linear program max⁡c′x\max c'xmaxc′x subject to Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b by a problem in which some data are random and each constraint only has to hold with a prescribed probability. Charnes and Cooper introduced the idea in 1959 for scheduling heating-oil production against weather-dependent demand, and the formulation is now a standard modelling tool in operations research, finance, energy systems and engineering design (Charnes and Cooper 1959; Prékopa 1995).

A chance-constrained problem is not directly solvable: its constraints are probabilities of events that depend on the decision. The 1963 paper of Charnes and Cooper (doi:10.1287/opre.11.1.18) asks when such a problem has a deterministic equivalent, an ordinary mathematical program with the same feasible decisions and corresponding objective values, and when that equivalent is a convex program. Its first answer, for the expected-value ('E') model under linear decision rules and normality, is the subject of this mission. The resulting constraint form, a mean slack dominating KαK_\alphaKα​ standard deviations, is an early instance of the second-order-cone reformulation of individual normal chance constraints used throughout modern stochastic and robust optimization.

Timeline. 1959: Charnes and Cooper, chance-constrained programming with the heating-oil model. 1963: this paper, deterministic equivalents for the E, V and P models under linear decision rules x=Dbx=Dbx=Db. 1965: Miller and Wagner treat joint chance constraints with independent rows (doi:10.1287/opre.13.6.930). 1971: Prékopa's logarithmically concave measures give convexity of joint chance constraints under log-concave laws.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. The data are a constant m×nm\times nm×n matrix AAA with rows a1′,…,am′a_1',\dots,a_m'a1′​,…,am′​, a random right-hand side b:Ω→Rmb:\Omega\to\mathbb R^mb:Ω→Rm and random objective coefficients c:Ω→Rnc:\Omega\to\mathbb R^nc:Ω→Rn. A linear decision rule is an n×mn\times mn×m real matrix DDD; it chooses x=Dbx=Dbx=Db after bbb is observed. Write μb=Eb\mu_b=Ebμb​=Eb, μc=Ec\mu_c=Ecμc​=Ec and b^=b−μb\hat b=b-\mu_bb^=b−μb​.

The E-model (18) is

max⁡ E(c′Db)subject toP(ai′Db≤bi)≥αi(i=1,…,m),\max\ E(c'Db)\quad\text{subject to}\quad P(a_i'Db\le b_i)\ge\alpha_i\qquad(i=1,\dots,m),max E(c′Db)subject toP(ai′​Db≤bi​)≥αi​(i=1,…,m),

with one probability level αi\alpha_iαi​ per row: the constraints are row-wise, as in (3) of the paper, not a single joint constraint.

For 12<α<1\tfrac12<\alpha<121​<α<1 let Kα=Φ−1(α)>0K_\alpha=\Phi^{-1}(\alpha)>0Kα​=Φ−1(α)>0 be the standard normal α\alphaα-quantile. With the moment functions (30),

σi2(D)=E(ai′Db−bi)2,μi(D)=μbi−ai′Dμb,\sigma_i^2(D)=E(a_i'Db-b_i)^2,\qquad \mu_i(D)=\mu_{b_i}-a_i'D\mu_b,σi2​(D)=E(ai′​Db−bi​)2,μi​(D)=μbi​​−ai′​Dμb​,

the paper's deterministic program (29) in the variables (D,v)(D,v)(D,v), v∈Rmv\in\mathbb R^mv∈Rm, is

min⁡ −μc′Dμbs.t.μi(D)−vi≥0,−Kαi2σi2(D)+Kαi2μi2(D)+vi2≥0,vi≥0.\min\ -\mu_c'D\mu_b\quad\text{s.t.}\quad \mu_i(D)-v_i\ge0,\quad -K_{\alpha_i}^2\sigma_i^2(D)+K_{\alpha_i}^2\mu_i^2(D)+v_i^2\ge0,\quad v_i\ge0 .min −μc′​Dμb​s.t.μi​(D)−vi​≥0,−Kαi​2​σi2​(D)+Kαi​2​μi2​(D)+vi2​≥0,vi​≥0.

Formalization targets

Goal: (18) is equivalent to the convex program (29)

Assume every bkb_kbk​ is square integrable, every cjc_jcj​ and cjbkc_jb_kcj​bk​ integrable, bbb and ccc uncorrelated (E(cjbk)=Ecj EbkE(c_jb_k)=E c_j\,E b_kE(cj​bk​)=Ecj​Ebk​), every variate ai′Db−bia_i'Db-b_iai′​Db−bi​ normal (for every DDD and iii, zero variance allowed), and 12<αi<1\tfrac12<\alpha_i<121​<αi​<1. Then

(∀D: D feasible for (18)  ⟺  ∃v, (D,v) feasible for (29)) ∧ (∀D: E(c′Db)=μc′Dμb) ∧ {(D,v) feasible for (29)} is convex.\Big(\forall D:\ D\text{ feasible for (18)}\iff\exists v,\ (D,v)\text{ feasible for (29)}\Big)\ \wedge\ \Big(\forall D:\ E(c'Db)=\mu_c'D\mu_b\Big)\ \wedge\ \{(D,v)\ \text{feasible for (29)}\}\ \text{is convex}.(∀D: D feasible for (18)⟺∃v, (D,v) feasible for (29)) ∧ (∀D: E(c′Db)=μc′​Dμb​) ∧ {(D,v) feasible for (29)} is convex.

Milestones, in the order of the paper

  1. (19a): E(c′Db)=(Ec)′D(Eb)E(c'Db)=(Ec)'D(Eb)E(c′Db)=(Ec)′D(Eb) for uncorrelated bbb, ccc.
  2. (22)–(27): with positive variance, P(ai′Db≤bi)≥αi  ⟺  (−μbi+ai′Dμb)/E[b^i−ai′Db^]2≤−KαiP(a_i'Db\le b_i)\ge\alpha_i\iff(-\mu_{b_i}+a_i'D\mu_b)/\sqrt{E[\hat b_i-a_i'D\hat b]^2}\le-K_{\alpha_i}P(ai′​Db≤bi​)≥αi​⟺(−μbi​​+ai′​Dμb​)/E[b^i​−ai′​Db^]2​≤−Kαi​​.
  3. (28a)–(28b): (27) holds iff some viv_ivi​ satisfies μbi−ai′Dμb≥vi≥KαiE[b^i−ai′Db^]2≥0\mu_{b_i}-a_i'D\mu_b\ge v_i\ge K_{\alpha_i}\sqrt{E[\hat b_i-a_i'D\hat b]^2}\ge0μbi​​−ai′​Dμb​≥vi​≥Kαi​​E[b^i​−ai′​Db^]2​≥0.
  4. (28c)–(28d): for vi≥0v_i\ge0vi​≥0, that pair is equivalent to its squared form.
  5. Footnote ‡ to (30): σi2(D)−μi2(D)=E[b^i−ai′Db^]2\sigma_i^2(D)-\mu_i^2(D)=E[\hat b_i-a_i'D\hat b]^2σi2​(D)−μi2​(D)=E[b^i​−ai′​Db^]2.
  6. The convexity paragraph after (30): the feasible set of (29) is convex in (D,v)(D,v)(D,v).
  7. 'V Model' (32)–(34): under the same normal chance assumptions and square integrability of each cjbkc_jb_kcj​bk​, the chance constraints of (32) are equivalent to (33) for some vvv; the pair feasible set and V(D)=E(c′Db−z0)2V(D)=E(c'Db-z^0)^2V(D)=E(c′Db−z0)2 are convex.

Significance

The result. The theorem turns a problem whose constraints are probabilities into a finite-dimensional convex program whose data are the first two moments of bbb and the means of ccc. The optimal rules of (18) minimize (29), whose optimal value is the negative of the maximum in (18). The slack variables viv_ivi​ separate each constraint into a "quality" part (the mean slack μi(D)\mu_i(D)μi​(D)) and a "risk" part (KαiK_{\alpha_i}Kαi​​ standard deviations), which is the interpretation the paper develops in (31) and its Appendix. The same constraint set serves the V-model (33), so only the objective changes between the two models.

Formalizing it. The result is classical and its proof is elementary, but the paper's argument is informal in ways that matter for a machine-checked version: it divides by a standard deviation it then allows to vanish, writes FiF_iFi​ for what must be an upper-tail function, and labels a variance as σi2(D)\sigma_i^2(D)σi2​(D) while defining σi2(D)\sigma_i^2(D)σi2​(D) as a raw second moment. This mission produces a statement in which each of these points is settled, with every hypothesis explicit. No machine-checked version of the result is known to exist.

Difficulty

The chance-constraint step itself is a one-dimensional fact about the normal law, but three points need care. The variance of ai′Db−bia_i'Db-b_iai′​Db−bi​ may be zero for some DDD and iii; then the law is a point mass, the quotient in (27) is undefined, and the equivalence must be argued separately, as footnote † of p. 28 indicates. The quadratic constraint of (29) alone, vi2≥Kαi2(σi2(D)−μi2(D))v_i^2\ge K_{\alpha_i}^2(\sigma_i^2(D)-\mu_i^2(D))vi2​≥Kαi​2​(σi2​(D)−μi2​(D)), describes both nappes of a hyperboloid and is not convex; convexity needs vi≥0v_i\ge0vi​≥0 and the positive semidefiniteness of D↦Var⁡(ai′Db−bi)D\mapsto\operatorname{Var}(a_i'Db-b_i)D↦Var(ai′​Db−bi​), which comes from square integrability of bbb and not from normality. Finally, the identity relating σi2\sigma_i^2σi2​, μi2\mu_i^2μi2​ and the variance requires the integrals to be genuine, so the integrability hypotheses cannot be dropped.

Formalization scope

Everything is in the namespace ChanceDetEquiv.EModel. The probability space is (Ω, P) with [IsProbabilityMeasure P]; A : Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ, b : Ω → Fin m → ℝ, c : Ω → Fin n → ℝ, D : Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ; ai′Dba_i'Dbai′​Db is (A *ᵥ (D *ᵥ b ω)) i. Expectations are Bochner integrals and probabilities are P.real. Explicit readings of the paper's phrases:

  • "deterministic equivalent for (18)" is the conjunction of an iff between feasible sets (with the auxiliary vvv existentially quantified) and E(c′Db)=μc′DμbE(c'Db)=\mu_c'D\mu_bE(c′Db)=μc′​Dμb​ for every DDD; (29) minimizes the negative of this mean;
  • "is a convex programming problem" is Convex ℝ of the feasible set of (29) in (D,v)(D,v)(D,v), vi≥0v_i\ge0vi​≥0 included; for the V model it also asserts ConvexOn ℝ of VVV;
  • "normally distributed" is: for every DDD and iii, the law of ai′Db−bia_i'Db-b_iai′​Db−bi​ is gaussianReal μ s for some μ\muμ and s≥0s\ge0s≥0; joint normality of bbb is not assumed, since it would be a stronger hypothesis;
  • "bbb and ccc are uncorrelated" is E(cjbk)=Ecj EbkE(c_jb_k)=E c_j\,E b_kE(cj​bk​)=Ecj​Ebk​ for all j,kj,kj,k;
  • Kα=Φ−1(α)K_\alpha=\Phi^{-1}(\alpha)Kα​=Φ−1(α), using the published definition Cohen2019_Robust_Phi; FiF_iFi​ in (26)–(27) is read as the upper-tail function of ziz_izi​, and αi<1\alpha_i<1αi​<1 is added so that KαiK_{\alpha_i}Kαi​​ is finite;
  • σi2(D)\sigma_i^2(D)σi2​(D) is the raw second moment exactly as printed in (30).

Positive variance is a hypothesis of milestones 2 and 3, where (27) has a denominator. The goal and later milestones admit zero variance. The statements admit no trivializing reading: the normality hypothesis is satisfied by constant and by Gaussian bbb, the integrability hypotheses rule out the junk value 000 of non-integrable expectations, and αi<1\alpha_i<1αi​<1 rules out the junk value of Φ−1(1)\Phi^{-1}(1)Φ−1(1).

A complete development needs: the normal CDF and quantile, the law of an affine image of a random variable, variance as EX2−(EX)2E X^2-(EX)^2EX2−(EX)2 in L2L^2L2, and convexity of the epigraph of a seminorm composed with an affine map. The convexity milestones need no probability beyond L2L^2L2 and are reusable for any second-order-cone representation of individual chance constraints. Proofs of any milestone, and of the goal from the milestones, are welcome.

The related open platform item KallMayer.Chance.chapter2_theorem2_5 (convexity of a single normal chance-feasible set in xxx) is credited here and not restated: no item of this mission states the convexity of the set of DDD feasible for (18). Related published items that are about other models: DRCVRP.RCI.prob_le_iff_valueAtRisk_le (chance constraints and value-at-risk for a general law) and the log-concavity results of NumStochOpt.LogConcave.

Selected references

  • A. Charnes and W. W. Cooper, Deterministic Equivalents for Optimizing and Satisficing under Chance Constraints, Operations Research 11(1), 1963, 18–39. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.11.1.18
  • A. Charnes and W. W. Cooper, Chance-Constrained Programming, Management Science 6(1), 1959, 73–79. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.1.73
  • A. Prékopa, Stochastic Programming, Kluwer, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-94-017-3087-7
  • P. Kall and J. Mayer, Stochastic Linear Programming, 2nd ed., Springer, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-7729-8
10 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimization and Approximation in Deterministic Sequencing and Scheduling: A Survey 2: The Optimal Preemptive Open Shop Makespan Equals the Largest Machine Load or Job LengthResearch Paper

Motivation

Open shops model production and service systems in which every job must visit every machine, but the order of the visits is free: a car that needs an inspection, a wash and a tyre change, a patient who needs several tests, a student who sits several exams. The survey of Graham, Lawler, Lenstra and Rinnooy Kan (Ann. Discrete Math. 5, 1979) fixed the three-field notation α∣β∣γ\alpha|\beta|\gammaα∣β∣γ that the scheduling literature still uses, and classified the complexity of the problems it can express. Among the polynomially solvable cases, the preemptive open shop with makespan objective, O∣pmtn∣Cmax⁡O|pmtn|C_{\max}O∣pmtn∣Cmax​, is one of the few multi-machine problems whose optimal value has a closed form for any number of machines and jobs.

Timeline.

  • 1976: Gonzalez and Sahni (J. ACM 23) prove that the optimal preemptive open-shop makespan is the largest machine load or job length, and give a polynomial algorithm. In the same paper they solve O2∥Cmax⁡O2\|C_{\max}O2∥Cmax​ in linear time and show O3∥Cmax⁡O3\|C_{\max}O3∥Cmax​ NP-hard.
  • 1978: Lawler and Labetoulle (J. ACM 25) give a linear-programming treatment of preemptive scheduling on unrelated machines and reformulate the open-shop construction in terms of decrementing sets, found by an assignment problem through the Birkhoff–von Neumann theorem.
  • 1979: the survey (§5.2.2, p. 313) presents this construction as the standard argument and records the O(r+min⁡{m4,n4,r2})O(r+\min\{m^4,n^4,r^2\})O(r+min{m4,n4,r2}) bound of Gonzalez (1976), where rrr is the number of nonzero processing times.

Setting

There are mmm machines M1,…,MmM_1,\dots,M_mM1​,…,Mm​ and nnn jobs J1,…,JnJ_1,\dots,J_nJ1​,…,Jn​. Job JjJ_jJj​ consists of operations O1j,…,OmjO_{1j},\dots,O_{mj}O1j​,…,Omj​; operation OijO_{ij}Oij​ must be processed on machine MiM_iMi​ for pij≥0p_{ij}\ge 0pij​≥0 time units. The processing-time matrix is P=(pij)P=(p_{ij})P=(pij​): its rows are machines and its columns are jobs. Every job is available at time 000.

Preemption is allowed: an operation may be interrupted and resumed later. A schedule is a finite list of pieces (i,j,s,e)(i,j,s,e)(i,j,s,e), each meaning that MiM_iMi​ processes JjJ_jJj​ during [s,e)[s,e)[s,e). A schedule is feasible if

  1. every piece satisfies 0≤s≤e0\le s\le e0≤s≤e;
  2. each machine processes at most one job at a time, and each job is processed on at most one machine at a time: two pieces that share a machine or a job do not overlap;
  3. for every pair (i,j)(i,j)(i,j) the pieces of OijO_{ij}Oij​ have total length exactly pijp_{ij}pij​.

The makespan Cmax⁡C_{\max}Cmax​ is the time at which the last piece ends, and Cmax⁡∗C^*_{\max}Cmax∗​ is its minimum over feasible schedules. The load of machine MiM_iMi​ is the row sum ∑jpij\sum_j p_{ij}∑j​pij​, the length of job JjJ_jJj​ is the column sum ∑ipij\sum_i p_{ij}∑i​pij​, and

C=max⁡{max⁡j∑ipij, max⁡i∑jpij}.C=\max\Big\{\max_j \sum_i p_{ij},\ \max_i \sum_j p_{ij}\Big\}.C=max{jmax​i∑​pij​, imax​j∑​pij​}.

A row or column is tight if its sum equals CCC and slack otherwise. A decrementing set is a set SSS of strictly positive entries of PPP with exactly one element in each tight row and each tight column and at most one in each slack row and each slack column.

Formalization targets

Goal: Cmax⁡∗=CC^*_{\max}=CCmax∗​=C

For every T≥0T\ge 0T≥0,

(∃ feasible schedule with Cmax⁡≤T)  ⟺  (∑jpij≤T ∀i  and  ∑ipij≤T ∀j).\big(\exists \text{ feasible schedule with } C_{\max}\le T\big)\iff \Big(\sum_j p_{ij}\le T\ \forall i\ \text{ and }\ \sum_i p_{ij}\le T\ \forall j\Big).(∃ feasible schedule with Cmax​≤T)⟺(j∑​pij​≤T ∀i  and  i∑​pij​≤T ∀j).

This says that the optimal makespan is exactly the largest machine load or job length, and that it is attained.

Milestones (all from §5.2.2, p. 313)

  1. Lower bound Cmax⁡∗≥CC^*_{\max}\ge CCmax∗​≥C.
  2. Existence of a decrementing set for every nonzero nonnegative PPP.
  3. Positive step: for a decrementing set, the largest δ\deltaδ satisfying the constraints (1)–(3) of the survey exists and is positive.
  4. Step property: after replacing each pij∈Sp_{ij}\in Spij​∈S by max⁡{0,pij−δ}\max\{0,p_{ij}-\delta\}max{0,pij​−δ}, the largest line sum is exactly C−δC-\deltaC−δ.
  5. Partial schedule: for each pij∈Sp_{ij}\in Spij​∈S, MiM_iMi​ processes JjJ_jJj​ for min⁡{pij,δ}\min\{p_{ij},\delta\}min{pij​,δ} time units, with no machine or job used twice.
  6. Termination: every run of the procedure reaches P′=(0)P'=(0)P′=(0) within a bounded number of stages.
  7. Joining: the concatenated partial schedules form a feasible schedule with Cmax⁡≤CC_{\max}\le CCmax​≤C.

Significance

The result. The theorem turns an optimization over continuous-time schedules into the computation of m+nm+nm+n sums. It certifies optimality by a counting argument, it is the base case for preemptive open shops with release dates and due dates, and it is used elsewhere in the survey (§4.4.6) to reduce problems on unrelated machines with preemption to open-shop instances. Because a nonnegative matrix whose row and column sums are all equal is a multiple of a doubly stochastic matrix, the theorem is a scheduling form of the Birkhoff–von Neumann decomposition. It also underlies timetabling and edge-colouring results for bipartite multigraphs.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved since 1976 and is textbook material. No machine-checked proof is known to exist: Mathlib has the Birkhoff–von Neumann theorem for doubly stochastic matrices but no model of open-shop schedules. A formalization adds a reusable model of preemptive multi-machine schedules with both disjointness requirements, a checked proof of the decrementing-set construction, and a termination argument the survey asserts without proof.

Difficulty

The lower bound is a one-line counting argument. The difficulty is the construction of a schedule of length exactly CCC. Scheduling each machine's operations back to back gives length max⁡i∑jpij\max_i\sum_j p_{ij}maxi​∑j​pij​, but may run one job on two machines at once. Scheduling job by job has the symmetric defect. A greedy list schedule that only respects both constraints can leave machines idle and overshoot CCC. The construction must keep every tight line busy at every moment while never letting a slack line fall behind. The existence of the decrementing set at each stage is the combinatorial core: it is a Hall-type matching condition, not a local choice. Termination is also not automatic, because a careless choice of step length can produce infinitely many shrinking steps.

Formalization scope

All objects live in the namespace SchedSurvey.OPmtn. Machines and jobs are Fin m and Fin n, both 0-based, and processing times and piece endpoints are real numbers; integer data are a special case. A schedule is a List of pieces. Feasibility requires nonnegative start times, disjointness for pieces sharing a machine or a job (touching intervals allowed), and exactly pijp_{ij}pij​ units of processing for every pair (i,j)(i,j)(i,j). Every theorem assumes pij≥0p_{ij}\ge 0pij​≥0.

"CCC is the maximum" is the predicate IsMaxLoad P C: all line sums are at most CCC and one equals CCC. The goal is stated in threshold form and mentions no maximum at all. The display defining CCC on p. 313 prints max⁡i{∑ipij}\max_i\{\sum_i p_{ij}\}maxi​{∑i​pij​} for the second term; the following sentence shows it means the row sums ∑jpij\sum_j p_{ij}∑j​pij​, and the formalization uses those. The hypothesis T≥0T\ge 0T≥0 matters only for P=0P=0P=0, where the empty schedule finishes by every TTT.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal mentions neither decrementing sets nor δ\deltaδ. Its "if" direction asserts that a schedule exists. Feasibility counts work per pair (machine, job), not per job, and forbids a job from running on two machines at once. Without either requirement the statement would be a different and easier theorem.

A complete development needs: list sums of interval lengths over disjoint intervals, the existence of decrementing sets (via Birkhoff–von Neumann, König's theorem or Hall's theorem on the bipartite graph of positive entries), the step and termination lemmas, and concatenation of schedules. The schedule model and the decrementing-set lemma are reusable for other preemptive shop problems. Contributions of alternative proofs of any milestone, for example a direct Hall-theorem proof of the existence of decrementing sets, are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. L. Graham, E. L. Lawler, J. K. Lenstra, A. H. G. Rinnooy Kan, Optimization and approximation in deterministic sequencing and scheduling: a survey, Annals of Discrete Mathematics 5 (1979) 287–326. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-5060(08)70356-X
  • T. Gonzalez, S. Sahni, Open shop scheduling to minimize finish time, Journal of the ACM 23 (1976) 665–679. https://doi.org/10.1145/321978.321985
  • E. L. Lawler, J. Labetoulle, On preemptive scheduling of unrelated parallel processors by linear programming, Journal of the ACM 25 (1978) 612–619. https://doi.org/10.1145/322077.322090
9 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 29 of 31Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me